JP2022148670A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance game amusement related to variable display.SOLUTION: When performance state selection designation value is 0C[H], a game state is a high probability and high-base state and can be determined to be a variation pattern PB1-8. When the performance state selection designation value is 0D[H], the game state is a low probability and high-base state and can be determined to be a variation pattern PB1-9. The variation pattern PB1-8 sets a special symbol variation time to 12,500 milliseconds, and the variation pattern PB1-9 sets a special symbol variation time to 29,900 milliseconds. In the case of both variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9, control for performing result display is performed; in the case of the variation pattern PB1-9, control for executing state notification performance is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-30

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

2. Description of the Related Art As a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is a game machine that reports specific game information in response to a final variable display in a variable probability state, as shown in Patent Document 1. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, an image display device displays a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4, and when the display mode of the meter reaches level 4, a plurality of bells are displayed. There is one in which one of the reach performances of super reach is executed.

JP 2017-164640 A JP 2015-221121 A

There is room for improving the marketability of the game machine having the functions and configurations of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display and is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and is a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state. variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern; and notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification including value notification for notifying the value obtained by the player. , as a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state, a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., , ready-to-reach production A), second suggestive production (for example, ready-to-reach production B), third suggestive production (for example, ready-to-reach production F), and fourth suggestive production (for example, ready-to-reach production E). Executable suggestive effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 19), and a special development effect before the effect result of the first suggested effect is notified can be executed as the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-8, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, from the execution of reach effect A, high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed), a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, the As shown in 20-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the effect result of reach effect B, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed. ) development effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 19), and the special state control means is the first number of times after the end of the advantageous state The special state can be controlled until the variable display is executed, the informing means executes the value notification during the variable display in which the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is the first number, The advantageous state includes a first-type advantageous state and a second-type advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determining means determines, when the number of executions of the variable display during the special state is the first number, the specified It can be determined using determination data, and when the number of executions of variable display during the special state is less than the first number of times, the A variable display pattern can be determined using the data for normal determination, and the data for normal determination is a specific variable display pattern and a special variable display corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state. any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including patterns can be determined, and the specific variable display pattern and the special Data for determining any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern different from the variable display pattern, wherein the specific determination data is the first type advantageous state. In both cases of the variable display that triggers control and the variable display that triggers control to the second type advantageous state, the specific variable display pattern is determined and controlled to the advantageous state. Data for determining a notification variable display pattern capable of executing the value notification by the notification means in response to a variable display that is not triggered, wherein the specific variable display pattern has a variable display period longer than that of the notification variable display pattern. It is a short variable display pattern (here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the big winning opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is "04". The specific determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when, for example, the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when, for example, the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9. The short variable display period may be, for example, the case of the variation pattern PB3-2 compared with the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32). When the first development pattern is executed by the performance executing means, the third suggestive performance having a higher degree of expectation than the first suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 20-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach η, the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A, and the ready-to-reach effect F is further executed). When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-8, super reach ζ In the variable display in the variation pattern of (1), after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect E is further executed). The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, as shown in FIGS. is a portion longer than the execution period length L6b of the reach effect E development notification effect), and the special development effect is a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55 ), and a second effect that is executed after the first effect and in which the preceding stage information is visually displayed (for example, the preceding stage shown in FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55 effect), and a third effect in which latter-stage information, which is a effect executed after the second effect and has a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding-stage information, is visibly displayed (for example, FIGS. 20-10 and 20 -55), and the period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification that the advantageous state is controlled. The period until it is notified that the state is controlled is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9, the end of the reach production I from the high expectation reach production development notification production start timing The length L13 of the period until the timing (notification timing of the variable display result), and the end timing of the reach effect F from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect The length L12 of the period until timing is set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E (notification timing of variable display result)). , is characterized by According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume, increase the degree of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result, improve the interest in the game related to the variable display, and execute the special development effect. In the case where the fourth suggestion performance is executed later, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the excessively prolonged period until the notification of the control to the advantageous state, and the special development performance. When the special suggestive effect is executed after the execution of , the player can be favorably focused on the special suggestive effect before being notified that the control is in an advantageous state, so that the interest in the game can be improved. , the marketability of the game machine can be enhanced.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart etc. which show special design process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a special figure display result. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows a jackpot classification determination example. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot variation pattern. It is a figure which shows a reference table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows a reference table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows a reference table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern classification selection table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern classification selection table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern classification selection table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern classification selection table. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation design specification command setting example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a figure which shows a special period production|presentation setting table. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting at the time of a big-hit start. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting at the time of a big-hit end. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting at the time of a big-hit end. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting at the time of a big-hit end. It is a flow chart which shows production design variation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation state control example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation state control example. It is a figure which shows the example of variable display control, the example of big-hit control, and the example of effect|presentation control at the time of a big-hit. It is a figure which shows the variable display control example. It is a figure which shows the example of variable display control. It is a figure which shows the variable display control example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation state control example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation state control example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the effect when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the preceding effect and the latter effect. It is an explanatory view showing an image display device. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of pre-reading announcement effect setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of meter effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the presence/absence of execution of a meter effect and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 4 is a timing chart showing first to fifth timings in each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of reach effect E development suggesting effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of branch destination suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestive effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of reach effect G development suggesting effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the ready-to-win effect determination ratio at the time of the big hit, (B) is a diagram showing the ready-to-win effect determination ratio at the time of losing, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D. (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in determination ratios of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-win effect D in the variation pattern of the super reach θ and the variation pattern of the super reach κ at the time of the big hit, and (E) is a super It is an explanatory diagram of a difference in determination ratios of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-win effect D in the variation pattern of the reach θ and the variation pattern of the super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing of the execution possible period of the chance up production|presentation in each ready-to-win production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the production|presentation which can be performed as a chance up production|presentation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the presence or absence of execution of chance-up effects and production patterns in each ready-to-win production, and (E) and (F) are diagrams for explaining the production patterns of the chance-up production in each ready-to-reach production. be. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of execution of a branch destination suggesting effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modified example. It is explanatory drawing of the length of revival production|presentation in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the right side of the game area. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display special symbols as a plurality of types of special identification information. A special design is also called a "special design." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game". Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. "Variable display" also means that a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner with respect to other symbols such as effect symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols. The production design is also called a decoration design or a decoration design. Variable display is also referred to as variable display or simply variation. Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation, enlargement, and reduction of one or more patterns. Variation may include a mode of blinking a certain symbol. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in an updatable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, a plurality of types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of arbitrary patterns, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result at the end. A stop display is also referred to as a derivation display, or simply a derivation. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display is also called a final stop symbol or a fixed symbol. The final stop symbol in the special symbol game is also called a fixed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also referred to as the variable display result. The display result of a special design is also called a special figure display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also called variable display time.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also called "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also called a "second special symbol". A special game using the first special game is also called a "first special game". A special game using the second special game is also called a "second special game". There may be one type of special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols.

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 . In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display device 20 can variably display normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary design is also called 'Fu-zu'. The variable display of normal symbols is also called a “normal game”. The normal symbol display 20 is configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which some or all of the plurality of LEDs are turned on, or a pattern in which all of the plurality of LEDs are turned off. The final stop pattern in the general pattern game is also called a fixed normal pattern. The normal pattern display result is also called a normal pattern display result. The execution time during which the normal pattern is variably displayed in the general pattern game is also referred to as general pattern fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 may be configured using any one of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), a projector, and a screen. In addition, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 can display various effect images. In addition, the image display device 5 can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image, without being limited to the effect image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game. The production pattern is a display pattern showing numbers and the like, and serves as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from special patterns and normal patterns. The screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. In synchronism with the game, for example, the performance symbols are displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction or updated to display the performance symbols, thereby performing variable display of the performance symbols. The synchronously executed special game and the variable display of the performance symbols are also generically called simply the variable display. Synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which pattern variation is started and the timing at which the pattern is finally stopped and displayed after the variation is completed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop pattern in the variable display of the production pattern is also called a fixed production pattern, a fixed decorative pattern, or a fixed decorative pattern. Since the variable display of performance symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the performance symbols is the same as the special symbol fluctuation time.

Even if a display area is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. good. Suspended presentations and active presentations are also collectively referred to as variable presentation-enabled presentations that correspond to variable presentations. A display area for holding display is also called a holding display area. A display area for active display is also called an active display area. The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The total value of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count. Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. . The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal design display 20 shown in FIG. 1, a normal design suspension display 25C including a plurality of LEDs is provided. 25 C of normal-map reservation|holding indicators display the number of normal-map reservation|holding memory|storages by the lighting number of LEDs. The number of reserved memory for the normal pattern is the number of reserved memory corresponding to the normal pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. Winning ball device 6A, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter. When the game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the first start condition for executing the first special figure game can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting prize opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 2 as a normal electric accessory. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, whereby the second start-up is performed. A closed state in which game balls do not enter the winning opening is established. The closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as the closed state of the second starting winning hole. The variable winning ball device 6B becomes an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by moving the movable wing to the tilted position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the ON state. The open state of the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as the open state of the second starting winning hole. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the second start condition for executing the second special figure game can be established. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

The entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as the first starting winning. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as second starting winning. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 21A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 21B shown in FIG. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize, the addition update of the first reserved memory number is enabled, and the variable display of the special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A can be executed as the first special pattern game. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, the addition update of the second reserved memory number becomes possible, and the variable display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B can be executed as the second special symbol game.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a general prize winning opening 10 is provided which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 1, two general winning openings 10 are provided at the lower left corner of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example ten, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first route and a second route are provided as flow paths along which game balls flow. The first path is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called a left game area or a left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called a right game area or a right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like. Shooting a game ball toward the left game area in order to make the game ball flow down the first path is also called left hitting. Shooting a game ball toward the right game area in order to make the game ball flow down the second path is also called right hitting. The first path is also referred to as a left-handed path. The second path is also called a right-handed path. The first route and the second route may be composed of separate routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared.

A game ball is shot from the ball shooting device and hit into the game area in response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball shooting device. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that it is guided to the second path in the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that it is guided to the first path in the left game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first path in the left game area, and allows game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the second path in the right game area, and allows game balls flowing down the second path to enter. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B may be able to enter the game ball flowing down the first path in the left game area. The variable winning ball device 6B may be arranged such that a game ball flowing down the second path in the right side gaming area is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first path in the left side gaming area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second path in the right game area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the normal reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 20 can be executed as the normal pattern game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 forms a large winning opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning opening solenoid 82 as a special electric accessory. An upper portion of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage having a passage width in the front-rear direction to the extent that game balls can pass therethrough. This guide path slopes down from the right side to the left side, and wall portions are provided on both sides of the extended passage, the front side and the back side. At the center of the guiding path, there is formed an accessory entrance that serves as a big winning entrance. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front-rear direction is provided as a large winning opening opening/closing member at a position where the large winning opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize winning ball device 50, a fixing member 53 forming a fixed passage is provided in a portion of the guide passage where the large winning opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by a grand prize opening solenoid 82, and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the accessory entrance serving as the grand prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50 , a game ball that has entered from the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 . Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Further, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. Above the V winning area 51, a plate-like distribution member is provided as a V winning opening opening/closing member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by a specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning area 51 . A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. A game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24 . A game ball that has not passed through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. Both the game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 and the game ball that has passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are detected by the outlet switch 26, and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. discharged to

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for the game machine, and a game effect lamp 9 for lighting effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. there is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED. At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball-hitting device. The hitting operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device. A serving tray is provided. The hitting ball supply plate is also called an upper plate. Below the upper plate, there is provided a prize ball storage plate in which the awarded balls flow down and are stored when the upper plate is full. The prize ball storage plate is also called a lower plate.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A can be gripped and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed and pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B shown in FIG. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as player's operations, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. It should be noted that, when the previous normal game is being executed, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed, so the normal game based on the passage cannot be performed. , for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number, such as "4". In the general pattern game, when a specific normal pattern such as a general pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, when a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a normal pattern losing pattern, is stop-displayed as a determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". In the case of a "normal hit", open control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second start winning opening is opened.

When a game ball enters through a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be started. When a game ball enters through a second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B can be started. In addition, during the period during which the special game is being executed, or during the period during which the game ball is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, even if the game ball enters the start prize opening and the start prize is generated, Since the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately, the special game based on the starting prize is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number such as "4". In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol such as a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". On the other hand, when a predetermined special symbol different from the big win symbol, such as a small winning symbol, is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "small winning". Further, when a special symbol different from the big win symbol or the small win symbol such as a lost symbol is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "loss". Furthermore, when a special pattern different from a big hit pattern, a small hit pattern, and a losing pattern, such as a time saving pattern, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time saving". . The special pattern may not include the time saving pattern. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include "time saving".

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is, for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, until the timing when a predetermined period of time elapses, or the timing when the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period during which the large winning opening can be controlled to be open is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in the big winning game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times, such as 15 times or 2 times, is reached. In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

When the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", it includes a plurality of big win types. For example, the game state after the end of the big win game state such as the opening mode of the big winning mouth such as the number of rounds and the upper limit of the opening period, the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variable state is set to a plurality of different settings, and the big win is set according to each setting. A type is specified. A plurality of jackpot types may include a part or all of a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained. Alternatively, the prize balls that can be obtained may include the same level of jackpot types. The control to the big win game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "big win" is also called a big win in the pattern, a big win by the special pattern, a big win in the variable display, or a direct hit.

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state. In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big winning openings can be opened in a similar manner by sharing the number of times of opening and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in an opening mode different from the big winning game state. Similar to the big hit type, even when the display result of the special symbol is "small hit", a plurality of small hit types may be included. The big hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big winning opening in the small winning game state is also called starting operation. When the game ball is in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened to become the big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24. A condition for generating a big win is established, and control to a big win game state becomes possible. Controlling to the big win game state based on the occurrence of the V prize by the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small win game state is also called a big win via a small win.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state corresponding to the jackpot type. Further, in the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "time saving", the game state is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the jackpot game state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is likely to pass through the second start winning opening is also called base control. Base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high-based control, the time-saving state may include mid-based control. Medium base control is base control in which a game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning opening than in low base control, but more difficult to pass through the second start winning opening than in high base control. The game state in which the middle base control is performed is also called a middle base state. A game state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also called high opening control.

In the case of the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible to stop display of the time-saving design as a display result of the special design. However, in the case of medium base state and high base state, even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of the special pattern, the base control based on the time saving pattern is not performed, and the medium base state or high base state is not performed. No new control to transition to the high base state is initiated. In the time-saving state, time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time compared to the normal state is possible. Accordingly, the time saving state is also referred to as a time shortening state.

Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, it is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is the variable probability state, in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. Accordingly, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. The probability variable state is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state, because the variable probability state is a state in which the "big win" is likely to occur in addition to the improvement of the special symbol variation efficiency. The time-saving state and probability variable state are continued until any one of the predetermined end conditions such as execution of a predetermined number of special game, control to the next big win game state, etc. is satisfied first. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut. The time-saving state of cutting the number of times is also called the time-saving state of cutting the number of times. The probability-variable state of the number-of-times cutting is also called a number-of-times-cutting probability variation.

The normal game state is an advantageous state such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, a predetermined state such as a small win game state, and a game state that is not included in special states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In the normal state, the probability that the display result in the normal game is "normal game", the probability that the display result in the special game is "big hit", etc. are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. It is in play state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a control state after executing the initial setting process without executing a predetermined recovery process after power-on, such as when the system is reset.

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the variable probability state as the game state.

After the small winning game state is finished, there are two cases: a case where the game state is controlled to the big winning game state based on the occurrence of the V winning prize, and a case where the game state before entering the small winning game state is not changed without generating the V winning prize. be. However, when the display result of the special game is "small hit" and the special game is executed a predetermined number of times in the cut, the control of the time saving state and the variable probability state ends and the normal state may occur. . In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the small winning game state as the game state. That is, the display result of the special symbols may not include the "minor hit".

It may be possible to control the game state to the time saving state when the time saving condition based on the number of execution times of the variable display is satisfied. Such a time-saving state is also called relief time-saving. The time-saving condition is that after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, after the occurrence of a big hit, or after the display result of the special figure game becomes "time-saving", even if variable display is executed for a specific number of times, a new big-hit game state or When control to a time saving state is not performed, what is necessary is just to be the conditions which can be established.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. This effect includes an effect for notifying the progress of the game and an effect for exciting the game. These effects include displaying various effects images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and operating the stick controller. Vibration of 31A or push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it can be executed using any production device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L provided on the screen of the image display device 5, At 5C and 5R, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. When the finalized special symbols that are the display result in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are stop-displayed, the finalized performance symbols that are the display result are stop-displayed in the variable display of the performance symbols. The fixed effect pattern is composed of a combination of three effect patterns corresponding to the "left", "middle" and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. During the period from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols to the end thereof, the display mode in the variable display of the performance symbols may be the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is a mode in which, when the performance symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the performance symbols that have not yet stopped continue to fluctuate. . The fact that the display mode in the variable display of the production pattern is the ready-to-win mode is also said to be the ready-to-win.

The ready-to-win effect can be executed in response to the variable display of the effect pattern becoming the ready-to-win mode. The pachinko game machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects so that the ratio of the display result of the variable display to be a "jackpot" differs when the effect modes are different. The ratio of "big win" corresponding to the effect mode is also called "big win reliability" and "big win expectation". The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal ready-to-win and super ready-to-win with higher reliability of big win than normal ready-to-win. In addition, a short reach and a long reach whose execution time is longer than the short reach may be included in correspondence with the execution time of the reach effect.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big win", the determined performance symbols that become a predetermined big win combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the performance symbol display result. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same production pattern, for example, a production pattern showing the number "7", is aligned and on a predetermined effective line. displayed to stop. In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big winning game state, odd-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``7'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. In the case of a ``non-probability variable big win'' which is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game state, even-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``6'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is also referred to as the "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd production design is also referred to as a probability variable design. The even-numbered production pattern is also called a non-variable pattern or a normal pattern. After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small win", fixed performance symbols that are a predetermined small win combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the performance symbols. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same performance symbols, such as a performance symbol indicating a number other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. May be paused on top. A common fixed performance symbol may be stop-displayed when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big win" and when it becomes a "minor win".

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the display result may be stopped and displayed without being in the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the effect symbols. In this case, as a result of displaying the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach mode is also called non-reach loss. When the display result of the special game is "losing", the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped after the ready-to-win production is executed. In this case, as a result of the display of the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations other than the big winning combination and the small winning combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win state is reached is also called a ready-to-win failure.

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko game machine 1 include display corresponding to variable display such as pending display and active display. In addition, for example, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit during the variable display of the effect symbols. The notice effect includes the variable notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display during execution, and the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display before the execution of which the execution is suspended. may contain. The pre-reading advance notice effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of variable display compatible display such as suspended display and active display to a mode different from usual.

On the screen of the image display device 5, once the performance symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then the variable display is restarted, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. It may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that makes it look like. The pseudo-continuous performance may be set so that the reliability of the big win is higher when the number of times of re-fluctuation for resuming the variable display after temporarily stopping the performance pattern is larger than when the number of times of re-fluctuation is small. . The variable display of the performance symbols may include a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed before the ready-to-win state is established and a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed after the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, the pseudo-continuous performance may be executed at a plurality of timings.

During the control of the big-hit game state, it is possible to execute the performance during the big-hit game for notifying the big-hit game state. The effect during the big win may include the effect of notifying the number of rounds and the promotion effect of suggesting or notifying that the advantage of the big win game state is improved. During the control of the small-hit game state, it is possible to execute a performance during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state. By executing a common performance during the control of the big win game state and during the control of the small win game state, the player can determine whether the current game state is the big win game state or the small win game state. It may be made unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

In a non-game state in which no special game or the like is executed and the game is not progressing, an effect image for demonstration can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The effect image for demonstration is also called a demo image. The display of the demonstration image is also called demonstration display. The production by the demonstration display is also called a customer waiting demonstration production.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17 and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states such as execution of special game with management of suspension, execution of general game with management of suspension, big hit game state, small hit game state, time saving state, probability variable state, etc. including the migration of The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100 , a switch circuit 110 and a solenoid circuit 111 .

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number It can be configured including a circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 . A part or all of the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the random number circuit 104 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be built in the game control microcomputer 100. good. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . Various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, starter switches such as a first starter switch 22A and a second starter switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data which ROM101 memorize|stores includes the table data etc. which comprise the table used for a variation pattern, production|presentation control command, other various setting, determination, and determination. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents stored in part or all of the storage area so as to be recoverable within a predetermined period of time even when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes storage areas capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to programs stored in the ROM 101 . The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. A random number used to control the progress of a game is also called a game random number. Part or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by CPU 103 . The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input and an output port to which various signals are output. Various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110 . Various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 are the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, A signal for controlling the normal figure holding display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal for driving the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc., may be included.

The main board 11 outputs an effect control command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by the game control microcomputer 100 . The effect control command is a command that designates or notifies the progress of the game or the like. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include commands for specifying various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display result of the special game, the winning type, and the variation pattern, for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, and winning. , the number of pending memories, the game state, and a command specifying the occurrence of an error.

The performance control board 12 is a sub side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function capable of receiving a performance control command and controlling the performance based on the received performance control command. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 are various effects according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various notifications such as error notification and power failure recovery notification. The performance control board 12 includes a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123 . This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determination of the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data of various tables, and uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes mainly display-related effects based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. control possible. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 . The sound designation signal designates sounds to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates a lighting mode or an extinguishing mode of the game effect lamp 9 . By supplying the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, it becomes possible to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32 or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32 . A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the effect control board 12 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. A random number used to control the execution of a performance is also called a random number for performance. The effect random number may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the effect control CPU 120 . The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output ports of the I/O 125 are an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for an audio designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. and an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and controls the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. 9 is lit or extinguished. In this manner, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. FIG. It should be noted that control of sound output and lamp lighting and extinguishing, such as supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, and control of the movable bodies 32, such as supply of signals for operating the movable bodies 32, are partly performed by the production control CPU 120. Or you may make it run all. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply electric power from an AC power supply such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have it. The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending power-on by operating the power switch 91 . The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal is turned off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing of a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. When the game control main process shown in FIG. 3 is started, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). As a result, no other processing is executed thereafter until interrupts are permitted. Subsequently, the built-in device register is set (step S2). In setting the built-in device register, for example, the built-in device register setting table is used to store the set value of the built-in device register at the specified built-in device address. Built-in device registers correspond to various circuits and electronic parts such as PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) as a timer counter, random number circuit 104, input port of I/O 105, serial communication circuit, and RWM access control circuit. It is acceptable as long as it is provided In addition, initialization of a stack pointer, setting of an interrupt vector, and the like may be performed.

Subsequently, an RWM check process (step S3) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S4). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 as a backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S4 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. The RWM check processing in step S3 includes checksum calculation processing. The checksum data obtained as the processing result is compared with the data stored in the checksum buffer. is normal. In step S4, whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied may be determined based on the result of confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors in the RWM check processing of step S3.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S4; Yes), settings for recovery are made. The setting for recovery includes designation of the backup-time command transmission table (step S5) and designation of the backup-time setting table (step S6). The backup time command transmission table includes table data for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a power failure restoration designation command designating that restoration using backup data has been performed. The setting table at the time of backup includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when recovery is performed using backup data. To designate a table, a value corresponding to the head address of the table stored in the ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or a table pointer. The same applies to other tables.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S4; No), settings for initialization are performed. The settings for initialization include RWM initial setting processing (step S7), designation of the command transmission table at initialization (step S8), and designation of the setting table at initialization (step S9). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area serving as the work area in the RAM 102 . The command transmission table at the time of initialization includes table data for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a power-on designation command designating that the initialization at the time of power-on has been performed. The initialization setting table includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific number counter to the specific number initial value. The setting table at initialization includes table data for setting the value stored in the specified number of times command buffer to the upper limit value of the specified number of times command. The specific number of times is the number of executions of variable display as a time saving condition for shifting the game state from the normal state to the time saving state when the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state or the time saving state continues.

Thereafter, command set processing (step S10) and data set processing (step S11) are executed. The command set process includes a process for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12 by storing the command data specified in the command transmission table in the serial communication data register. The data setting process includes a process of storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using the data setting table specified by the pointer, and a process of clearing the stored contents of the address indicated by the table data.

Then, after executing the wait process (step S12), the specific number of times command transmission process (step S13) is executed. In the wait process, by waiting until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, sub-boards such as the effect control board 12 can be reliably activated. The specified number of times command processing is a process for transmitting to the presentation control board 12 an effect control command designating the count value of the specific number of times counter when the power is turned on. The specific number counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and may be capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number corresponding to the time saving condition.

Following the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13, interrupt initialization (step S14) is performed, and the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals, such as 4 milliseconds. , enter loop processing. In this loop processing, interrupt prohibition (step S15), initial value determination random number update processing (step S16), and interrupt permission (step S17) are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, every time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 is enabled to execute timer interrupt processing. As a result, the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals, such as 4 milliseconds.

FIG. 4A is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. The CPU 103 can execute game control timer interrupt processing by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4A includes a power-off process (step S21), a switch process (step S22), a main-side error process (step S23), and a game random number update process (step S24 ), special symbol process processing (step S25), normal symbol process processing (step S26), information output processing (step S27), prize ball processing (step S28), and main side display control processing (step S29) and includes

The power-off processing in step S21 includes processing for confirming a power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 and determining whether or not power-off has occurred. When power failure occurs, checksum calculation processing is executed, checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, and then settings for power failure such as prohibition of RWM access are performed. In the switch processing of step S22, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the count switch 23, etc. that are input via the switch circuit 110 are detected. includes a process of determining The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main-side error processing in step S23 includes processing for diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, generating a warning according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S24 includes a process of updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

FIG. 4B shows an example of game random numbers. The game random numbers are a random number MR1 for special symbol determination, a random number MR2 for winning symbol selection, a random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern. , a random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination, and a random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for special design determination is used when judging the display result of the special design, such as whether the display result of the special design is a "big hit" or whether the display result of the special design is a "small hit". used for The random number MR2 for selecting the winning pattern is a plurality of fixed special patterns, such as a big winning pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "big hit" and a small winning pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "small hit". It is used when selecting from the special symbols of . The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used for selecting the variation pattern type of the special symbols. The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is used for determining the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. The random number MR6 for judging the normal symbol hit is used when judging the display result of the normal symbol as to whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is set to "normal hit". The random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 and the random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 are used not only in the game random number update process of step S24, but also in the initial value determination random number update process of step S16 shown in FIG. It should be updatable.

The variation pattern is one or more variation patterns included in the variation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type. It is determined using the value of the determination random number MR5. The variation pattern designates various variable setting items including a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game, a mode of variable display of the performance symbols, and the contents of the performance during the variable display of the performance symbols. The special figure fluctuation time is also the execution time in the variable display of the production design. The aspect of the variable display of the effect pattern includes the presence or absence of reach. The production contents during the variable display of the production pattern include the type of ready-to-win production. The variation pattern is also called a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group including one or a plurality of variation patterns classified in advance based on, for example, the performance mode during the variable display of the performance symbols.

The special symbol process processing of step S25 shown in FIG. 4A includes management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc., and variable display of special symbols. It includes processing related to the game state. The normal symbol process processing in step S26 includes variable normal symbols, such as management of execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal pattern win". It includes processing related to display and state control of the second start winning opening. Information output processing in step S27 sets an information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability variation information. The jackpot information indicates the number of occurrences of jackpots and the like. The starting information indicates the number of starting winnings and the like. The probability variation information indicates, for example, the number of times the probability variation state has occurred. The prize ball processing in step S28 includes prize ball command output counter addition processing and prize ball control processing. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table is used to determine whether the switch is turned on, and when the switch is detected to be on, the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter are updated. The prize ball control process selects the process corresponding to the prize ball process code, and controls the payout of the prize balls based on the detection of the game balls. The main side display control process of step S29 includes display setting of the first special symbol and display setting of the second special symbol. The display setting of the first special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A to be updatable by executing the special symbol control process. The display setting of the second special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B to be updatable by executing the special symbol control process.

FIG. 5(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4(A) as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting prize determination process (step S101). The starting prize determination process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number. When the occurrence of the start winning prize is detected, if the pending memory number is less than the upper limit value, a random value used for determining the display result, winning type, variation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random value is stored as reserved information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After updating the storage of the pending information and the number of pending memories, to the effect control board 12, there is a command setting for transmitting the effect control command that specifies the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination. done. By such command setting, the effect control command at the time of start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁

CPU103 reads the special figure process code memorize|stored in the predetermined address of RAM102, after performing the start winning a prize determination process of step S101 (step S102). The special figure process code can be updated to any one of 00 [H] to 0B [H], and is also called a special symbol process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the special figure process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of the special symbols.

FIG. 5(B) shows an example of a process that can be executed in correspondence with the special symbol process code in the special symbol process. The special symbol process processing includes special symbol normal processing corresponding to the special symbol process code 00 [H] and special symbol process code corresponding to the special symbol process code 01 [H] as executable processing corresponding to the special symbol process code. Special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing corresponding to special symbol process code 02 [H], small hit pre-opening processing special symbol process code corresponding to 03 [H], special symbol process code is 04 [ H], a small hit open process corresponding to the special process code 05 [H], a small hit discharge ball waiting process corresponding to the special process code 06 [H] , Small winning end processing corresponding to special process code 07 [H], big winning opening pre-processing corresponding to special process code 08 [H], special process code corresponding to 09 [H] large winning opening opening process, special winning opening post-opening process corresponding to special figure process code 0A [H], and jackpot end processing special figure process code corresponding to 0B [H]. .

The special symbol normal processing includes processing capable of determining whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reservation information. In the special symbol normal processing, based on the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination, whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or a "minor hit", and whether or not it is a "time saving". It includes processing that can determine whether or not to The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining a fixed special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of special symbols in response to the determination of the display result. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining a variation pattern. Thus, in the special symbol normal process, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, before the display result is derived and displayed, various judgments and decisions (predetermined) regarding the variable display are performed, Special figure process code is updated to 01 [H].

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when performing various determinations and determinations based on random numbers. The same applies to other judgments and determinations using random numbers on the main board 11 . Even when random numbers are not used, a necessary table may be read out from the ROM 101 and referenced to perform various determinations, determinations, settings, and the like. In the effect control board 12, various kinds of tables may be read out from the ROM 121 and referred to, and various judgments, determinations, settings, and the like may be performed.

In the special symbol normal process, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol, even if the special symbol 2 priority digestion control is performed good. Alternatively, in the special symbol normal process, the winning order digestion control of establishing the starting condition of the special symbol game in the winning order corresponding to the order in which the game balls win in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. may be performed.

In the special symbol variation processing, the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. It includes a process of determining whether or not When the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the symbol stop time for stop-displaying the confirmed special symbols is set, the count values of various counters are updated, and the special figure process code is updated to 02 [H]. In the special symbol stop processing, the elapsed time after the special symbols stop varying in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the symbol stop time set in the special symbol variation processing is measured. includes a process of determining whether or not has elapsed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special figure process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the special figure process code is updated to 08[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special figure process code is updated to 03 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "loss", the special figure process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", setting corresponding to the start of the big win game state is performed. When the display result of the variable display is "small win", setting corresponding to the start of the small win game state is performed. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving", the setting for controlling the game state to the time saving state is performed.

In the small hit opening preprocessing, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is "small hit", setting is made to open the big winning opening in the small win game state, and the special process code is set to 04 [ H]. The small-hit open process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after the large winning opening is opened in the small-hit game state, and determining whether or not the opening time for the small-hit has passed. When the opening time for small hits has passed, the special figure process code is updated to 05 [H] along with the setting for closing the big winning opening. After the small hit opening process, the winning of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is detected, and the special figure process code is updated to 06 [H] after the lapse of a predetermined time. The small winning ball standby process includes a process of setting a large winning hole discharging ball error, determining passage through the V winning area 51, and determining completion of discharge of the big winning hole. When it is determined that the discharge of the big winning opening is completed, the special figure process code is updated to 07 [H] along with the setting before the end of the small hit. The small hit end process includes a process of determining whether or not the V winning area 51 is passed by a specific area passing flag. The specified area passage flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the ON state when there is a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 . When the specific area passing flag is ON, the special figure process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the start setting of the jackpot. When the specific area flag is off, along with the end setting of the small hit, the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

In the pre-opening processing for the big winning gate, settings are made to control the opening of the big winning gate, such as updating the counter for the number of times the big winning gate is opened and setting when opening the big winning gate, including operating settings for the big winning gate. Update the special figure process code to 09 [H]. The processing during the opening of the big winning opening measures the time elapsed since the opening of the big winning opening in the jackpot game state, and detects the winning of the big winning opening. When the opening time for big win has passed, along with the setting for closing the big winning opening, the special figure process code is updated to 0A[H]. In the processing after opening the large winning opening, after setting the error of the ball discharged from the large winning opening, the end of the time after the opening of the large winning opening is determined. includes a process of determining the count value of When the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is less than the maximum number of large winning opening opening numbers, the special figure process code is updated to 08[H] and the next round can be started. When the count value of the big winning mouth opening number counter is the maximum value of the number of times the big winning mouth is opened, along with the setting at the end of opening including the setting of the jackpot ending performance time, the special process code is updated to 0B [H]. . The jackpot end processing includes processing for determining whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed. When the jackpot end performance time elapses, the jackpot end setting including the game state setting at the time of the jackpot end is cleared, and the special figure process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing includes a special symbol big hit determination process and a special symbol small hit determination process. Also, the special symbol normal processing may include a special symbol time reduction determination process. In these determination processes, using the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read from the buffer for special symbol determination, a special symbol determination value check is performed to determine which determination range the value is included in. For example, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the big hit determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" by the special symbol big hit determination process. Further, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the small hit determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is "small hit" by the special symbol small hit determination process. When the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the time saving determination range, it may be determined that the special symbol display result is set to "time saving" by the special symbol time saving determination process.

FIG. 6 shows an example of determination of the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbols. The value specified for start-up winning is set to "1" corresponding to the first start-up winning due to the game ball entering the first start-up winning opening, and the game ball entering the second start-up winning opening. "2" is set corresponding to the case of the second start winning. That is, when the start opening designated prize value is "1", the first special symbol game, which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, is executed. On the other hand, when the start opening winning designation value is "2", the second special symbol game, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, is executed. In the special symbol big hit determination process, special symbol small hit determination process, and special symbol time reduction determination process, the special figure display result corresponds to the case where the start opening winning designation value is "1" and the case where it is "2". An MR1 judgment value to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 is set so as to determine one of "big hit", "small hit", "time saving", and "losing". The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to "big hit" is also called a big hit determination value. The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to the "small hit" is also called a small hit determination value. The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to "time saving" is also called time saving determination value. The big-hit probability based on the setting of the big-hit determination value indicates the ratio of the big-hit by the special game. The small-hit probability by setting the small-hit determination value indicates the ratio of the small-hit by the special game. The time saving probability by setting the time saving judgment value indicates the rate at which the base control can be changed by the special figure game.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing of the RAM 122, setting of various initial values, and register setting for the timer circuit mounted on the effect control board 12. At this time, an initial operation control process (step S72) is executed. The initial motion control processing includes control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position, control for confirming a predetermined motion, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined period of time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses based on, for example, register settings for the timer circuit. When the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated to wait.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing (step S75) is executed. Command analysis processing, for example, after reading various production control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, to the read production control command Processing such as corresponding setting and control is included. For example, which production control command has been received, or the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing, etc., and the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. , the reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on. When the effect control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process (step S76) is executed. The effect control process includes, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. It includes control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of. Determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc., for the control contents of the performance operation using various performance devices. Random number update processing for production (step S77) is executed following the production control process. The effect random number update process updates at least part of the effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 12 by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 8(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 shown in FIG. 7 as the effect control process. The effect control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead effect setting process (step S151) in the effect control process. The look-ahead effect setting processing includes, for example, processing such as determination, determination, and setting regarding the execution of the look-ahead prediction effect based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11 . Moreover, processing for displaying a pending display based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command is included.

After executing the look-ahead effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads the effect process code stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 122 (step S152). The production process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0A[H], and is also called production control process code. The effect control CPU 120 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the effect process code (step S153). Thereby, it becomes possible to control the execution of the production including the variable display of the production pattern.

FIG. 8(B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the production process code in the production control process. The production control process processing includes a variation pattern command waiting process corresponding to the production process code 00 [H] and a production pattern command processing corresponding to the production process code 01 [H] as executable processes corresponding to the production process code. Fluctuation start processing, production pattern fluctuation process corresponding to production process code 02 [H], production design fluctuation stop processing corresponding to production process code 03 [H], production process code to 04 [H] A corresponding small hit display process, a small hit open process corresponding to the production process code 05 [H], a small hit end production process corresponding to the production process code 06 [H], and a production process code 07 [ H], mid-round processing with a production process code of 08 [H], post-round processing with a production process code of 09 [H], and production process code of 0A [H]. and a jackpot end effect process corresponding to the

Variation pattern command reception waiting processing includes processing that can determine whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is received. For example, the presence or absence of reception can be determined by whether or not the variation pattern specification command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command is received, the effect process code is updated to 01[H]. Demonstration display control is performed when it is determined that no variation pattern designation command has been received. The effect symbol variation start processing includes processing for controlling to start the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the special symbol game. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, the production pattern for the production at the time of fluctuation is selected, the timing value of the production process timer for measuring the production execution time is started to be updated, and the production process code is updated to 02 [H]. be done. The performance symbol change processing includes processing for controlling the switching timing of each performance element constituting the performance pattern and determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the measured value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03[H]. The production pattern fluctuation stop processing is based on the fact that the production execution time has elapsed or the completion condition of the production at the time of fluctuation is satisfied, such as the reception of the production pattern confirmation command, and the end control of the production at the time of fluctuation is performed. It includes processing to control so that the effect result corresponding to the special symbol can be displayed. Then, the rendering process code is updated and various settings are performed according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the effect process code is updated to 07[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "minor hit", the effect process code is updated to 04[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "loss", the production process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The small win display processing includes setting processing for performing a small win fanfare effect when a small win occurs. The small-win fanfare performance includes a small-win display in which a performance image for notifying the occurrence of a small-win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the time for the small-win fanfare performance elapses. When the small winning fanfare performance time elapses, the performance process code is updated to 05[H] along with the termination control of the small winning fanfare performance. In the minor winning opening processing, setting is made for performing a minor winning opening performance in response to the opening of the big winning opening in the minor winning game state, and the performance process code is updated to 06 [H]. The small-hit end effect processing includes a process of controlling to display an effect image for notifying the end of the small-hit game state on the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, when a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 in the small winning game state and it is determined that V winning has occurred, the execution control of V winning performance for notifying the occurrence of V winning is performed. When V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the effect process code is updated to 07 [H]. When the V prize is not generated in the small winning game state, the effect process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The big win display processing includes setting processing for performing a fanfare effect when a big win occurs. The fanfare performance includes a big win display in which a performance image for notifying the occurrence of a big win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare performance time elapses. When the fanfare effect time elapses, the effect process code is updated to 08[H] along with end control of the fanfare effect. In-round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot gaming state. When the round end condition is established, if the final round is not ended, the performance process code is updated to 09 [H], and if the final round is completed, the performance process code is updated to 0A [H]. The post-round processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the round start condition is established, the production process code is updated to 08[H]. The jackpot end effect includes a process of controlling the display of the effect image for notifying the end of the jackpot game state on the screen of the image display device 5 . After that, when the notification time of the end of the jackpot has passed, the effect process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operations in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of. In the above embodiment, when a matter that is a more specific concept is described, an invention of a generic concept using a matter of the same family or similar kind, or an invention of a generic concept using a common property is the invention of the present application. It may have some of the structures and characteristics described in the above embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, or an enclosed type that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern, such as a symbol indicating "-", may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of this pattern. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, as a display result, the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed, and a non-display state may be employed in which no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be provided with a configuration in which the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed corresponding to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value that is set, it may be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot and the ball output rate. As a specific example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. lower. In this case, if 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . The setting suggesting effect may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by an arbitrary effect, and may suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

The invention relating to the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player. It is possible to execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for realizing various controls including the progress of a game and the execution of effects can be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a game machine such as the pachinko game machine 1 via a detachable recording medium. It may be something that can be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device such as a computer device. Further, it may be provided with a communication processing unit connectable to an external device on a network via a communication line or the like, and may be distributed or provided by downloading the program or data from the external device. The mode of execution of games and presentations may be executable by installing a detachable recording medium, or programs and data downloaded via a communication line etc. may be temporarily stored in an internal memory or the like. or can be directly executed using hardware resources in an external device on a network connected via a communication line, or another computer device A game or performance may be executed by exchanging data via a network.

Expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" when comparing various ratios such as the determination ratio of processing and data, the execution ratio of effects, etc. may include being For example, one decision result or execution content may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of "0%", or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 23AK)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 23AK is controlled so that the display result of the special symbols is "losing" or "big win" but not "minor win" or "time saving". Further, based on the establishment of a predetermined variable probability control condition, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game state. The variable probability state is controlled to continue until a predetermined variable probability end condition is satisfied, such as execution of a predetermined number of variable displays or the start of the next jackpot game state.

When the game is in the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24. Then, the probability variable control condition for entering the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state is established. That is, the setting location of the specific area switch 24 can be set as a specific area, and the variable probability control condition can be established based on the game ball passing through this specific area.

Based on the establishment of such variable probability control conditions, after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to the high probability high base state. In the high-probability-high base state, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than in the normal state due to the variable probability control, and the high-base control makes it easier to perform variable display than in the normal state. Based on the non-satisfaction of the variable probability control condition, after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to the low probability high base state. In the low-probability-high base state, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the same as in the normal state, and the high-base control makes it easier to perform variable display than in the normal state.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the total reserved memory number is "0" (step AKS101). The total number of pending memories indicates the number of pending information items related to variable display that have not yet started, which is the sum of the number of first pending memories and the second number of pending memories. In step AKS101, for example, when the count value of the total pending storage counter is "0", it is determined that the total pending storage number is "0". The total pending storage counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and may be capable of counting the total number of pending storages.

When the total number of reserved memories is other than "0" in response to step AKS101 (step AKS101; No), the total number of reserved memories is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). At this time, the data indicating the specified value of the start winning prize may be set. For example, when the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the start opening winning designation value is set to "2", and the second reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start opening winning designation value is set to "1", and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting one. If the total reserved memory count is other than "0" at step AKS101, at least one of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is not "0". When setting the data indicating the start-point winning designation value, by first determining whether or not the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the special game using the second special symbol is better. , It is sufficient if it can be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Following step AKS102, a special symbol determination control table is designated (step AKS103). The special symbol determination control table stores various kinds of information used for control of determination regarding special symbols. For example, the special symbol determination control table designates addresses of a special symbol determination buffer, a winning symbol buffer, a special symbol buffer, and the like. The special symbol determination buffer is for special symbol determination out of the game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning by the start winning determination processing in step S101 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5(A). is stored data indicating the random number MR1 of . The winning symbol buffer stores data indicating a winning symbol selection random number MR2 among game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning. The special symbol buffer stores data indicating a fixed special symbol. The determined special symbol is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game.

The special symbol determination control table may include a first special symbol determination control table corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol determination control table corresponding to the second special symbol. In step AKS103, after designating the second special symbol determination control table, it may be determined whether or not the start winning designation value is "1". Then, when the start opening winning designation value is "1", the first special symbol determination control table may be designated again. Designation of the second special symbol determination control table can be executed by storing a value corresponding to the top address of the second special symbol determination control table in the HL register serving as a pointer. When redesignating the first special symbol determination control table, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing the value corresponding to the top address of the first special symbol determination control table in the HL register serving as a pointer. In this way, after designating the second special symbol determination control table, when the start opening winning determination value is "1", by resetting the first special symbol determination control table, the second special symbol determination When the frequency of use of the control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity of the storage instructions used for setting the table can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced. Also, when the frequency of use of the second special symbol determination control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, processing by a branch instruction is simplified, confirmation at the design stage is facilitated, and the pachinko game is played. The marketability of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

After step AKS103, the memory contents of the special symbol corresponding buffer are shifted (step AKS104). The special symbol corresponding buffer includes a variation pattern type selection buffer, a variation pattern buffer, etc. in addition to a special symbol determination buffer and a winning symbol buffer, and indicates a game random number extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning. Any buffer for storing random numbers in which data is stored may be used. In step AKS104, for example, after setting the transfer destination address, the transfer source address, and the number of transfers, by executing a block transfer command, the storage contents in each storage area of the special symbol corresponding buffer are transferred to the previous storage area by one unit. , and then shift it.

Following step AKS104, the value of random number MR1 for special symbol determination is read (step AKS105). After that, special symbol jackpot determination (step AKS106) and special symbol information setting (step AKS107) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbols in the special symbol game is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing", and is not determined to be "small hit" or "time saving".

The special symbol big hit determination in step AKS106 determines whether or not the special symbol display result is a "big hit" by comparing the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS105 with the big hit determination value. . Determination of whether or not to make the special figure display result "big hit" is determination of whether or not to control to the big hit game state as an advantageous state. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is "big hit" in the special symbol big hit determination, 01 [H], which is the big hit designation value, is set to the hit flag. It should be noted that the hit flag is set to 00 [H] which is the initial value when the special symbol normal process is executed.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS107 includes the setting of the jackpot type and the setting of the jackpot symbol when the special symbol display result is "big hit", the setting of the losing symbol when the special symbol display result is "losing", contains. Data indicating the jackpot type is stored and stored in a jackpot type buffer. Data indicating fixed special symbols such as jackpot symbols or losing symbols are stored and stored in a special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer includes a first special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol buffer corresponding to the second special symbol. At step AKS107, the address of the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer can be identified by referring to the special symbol determination control table specified at step AKS103.

After step AKS107, data setting after determination (step AKS108) and variation pattern setting processing (step AKS109) are executed, and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. Post-judgment data setting in step AKS 108 includes designation of a post-judgment work setting table and execution of data set processing. When specifying the work setting table after determination, by referring to the special symbol determination control table specified by step AKS103, the address of the work setting table after determination corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be specified. is. The data set processing of step AKS109 may include data clear processing for clearing the special design determination buffer and the winning design buffer and initializing the stored values.

When the total reserved storage number is "0" corresponding to step AKS101 (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (step AKS110). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration display is being executed. When the demonstration display flag is ON (step AKS110; Yes), the special symbol normal process ends. On the other hand, if the demonstration display flag is off (step AKS110; No), the demonstration display flag is set to the on state (step AKS111), and after setting the standby command transmission (step AKS112), a special The symbol normal process ends. The transmission setting in step AKS112 includes specification of a standby command transmission table and command set processing. The standby command transmission table may contain table data for transmitting the background designation command and the customer waiting demo command.

FIG. 9-2 shows a jackpot type determination example AKD01. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-1, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS107, when the special symbol display result is "jackpot", the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type. settings. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] and indicates the jackpot specified value, the data indicating the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type is read, and the starting opening winning prize specified value, the probability variation flag, A jackpot type determination table is selected corresponding to the time saving flag. In the jackpot type determination table, if the starting entrance winning value is "1" and "2", if the variable probability flag is on and off, if the time saving flag is on and off, etc. , may be prepared in advance corresponding to each of them. The probability variable flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the high probability state as the probability variable state, and the time saving flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the high base state as the time saving state. The jackpot type determination table is composed of table data including determination value data. The determination value data of the jackpot type determination table indicates a determinable distribution determination value for each jackpot type, and a plurality of distribution determination values corresponding to a plurality of jackpot types can be set. In the special pattern information setting in step AKS107, when the special pattern display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type is determined using the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the jackpot pattern is determined using the random number MR2 for selecting the winning pattern. You may select a special pattern that will be. For example, when the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type is sequentially compared with a plurality of distribution judgment values shown in the judgment value data, and the random number value becomes equal to or less than the distribution judgment value, A jackpot type corresponding to the distribution determination value may be determined. Alternatively, the determination of the jackpot type and the selection of the jackpot pattern may be performed using the random number MR2 for the hit pattern selection.

In the jackpot game state, there are a plurality of jackpot types with common or different settings for the upper limit time for the distribution member serving as the V prize opening opening/closing member to open the V prize area 51 during execution of a specific round. As an example, a plurality of jackpot types can be classified into a case where the jackpot type is "normal" and a case where the jackpot type is "variable probability". Among them, when the jackpot type is "normal", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 50 milliseconds (ms). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "variable probability", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 29500 milliseconds. Therefore, when the jackpot type is "normal", the probability of the game ball passing through (entering) the V prize area 51 is low, and the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is difficult to be established. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "variable probability", there is a high possibility that the game ball passes through (enters) the V winning area 51, and the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is established. Cheap.

In this embodiment, jackpot types NA01 to NA11 are included when the jackpot type is "normal", and jackpot types KA01 to KA15 are included when the jackpot type is "probability variation". In the decision example AKD01, if the specified value of the starting opening winning prize is "1" and "2", corresponding to the presence or absence of variable probability control in the variable probability state, the presence or absence of high base control in the time saving state, etc., multiple at a predetermined ratio Any one of the jackpot types can be determined. Here, in the case of "no" high base control is not performed, the jackpot type is determined by a different ratio depending on whether the variable probability control is "no" or "yes". On the other hand, in the case of "yes" in which high base control is performed, the jackpot type is determined by a common ratio between the cases of "no" and "yes" of variable probability control. In addition, it is possible to determine a partly or wholly different jackpot type depending on whether the designated value for starting winning prize is "1" or "2".

In the decision example AKD01, when both the probability variable control and the high base control are "none", when the starting opening winning prize specified value is "1", either the jackpot types NA01 to NA04 or the jackpot types KA01 to KA06 On the other hand, when the starting opening winning designation value is "2", it can be determined to be one of the big hit types NA05 to NA07 and the big hit types KA07 to KA10. Therefore, when the variable probability control and the high base control are both "none", it is possible to determine different jackpot types depending on whether the starting opening winning prize designation value is "1" or "2". In addition, when the variable probability control is "yes" and the high base control is "no", when the starting opening winning prize specified value is "1", the jackpot types NA02, NA04 and the jackpot types KA02, KA04 to KA06 While any one can be determined, when the starting opening winning designation value is "2", it is possible to determine one of the big hit types NA05 to NA07 and the big hit types KA07 to KA10. Therefore, when the variable probability control is "yes" and the high base control is "no", the specified value of the starting opening winning prize is "1" and "2", and all can be determined as different jackpot types. be. Alternatively, when the high-base control is "yes", when the start-up winning designation value is "1", it is possible to decide between the jackpot type NA08 and the jackpot types KA11 and KA15. When the winning designation value is "2", it can be determined to be one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In this way, when the high base control is "yes", it is possible to determine the common jackpot type KA15 in the case of the starting entry winning designation value of "1" and the case of "2". Therefore, when the high-base control is "yes", it is possible to determine a partially different jackpot type depending on whether the starting entry winning designation value is "1" or "2".

In the decision example AKD01, when the specified value for starting winning prize is "1", regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control or the presence or absence of high base control, the jackpot type is "normal ”, and the jackpot type is determined to be included in “probability variation” at a determination rate of 100/200, ie, a determination rate of 50%. In addition, when the starting opening winning prize specified value is "2", the jackpot type is included in "normal" at a determination rate of 12/200, that is, a determination rate of 6%, regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control or high base control. The jackpot type is determined to be included in the "probability variation" with a determination rate of 188/200, that is, a determination rate of 94%. In this way, when the specified value for start winning prize is "2", the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variation" at a higher rate than when the specified value for starting win prize is "1". Therefore, the special symbol display result in the special symbol game using the first special symbol is better when the special symbol display result is "big hit" in the special symbol game using the second special symbol and is controlled to the big win gaming state. is "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is finished can be controlled to the probability variable state at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the big win game state.

The jackpot type determination table corresponds to what is included in the "normal" jackpot type that can be determined regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control or the presence or absence of high base control when the specified starting value is "1". A determinable jackpot having a plurality of divisions in the order of a first division of 11/200, a second division of 44/200, a third division of 11/200, and a fourth division of 34/200. The 5th division whose determination ratio is 12/200, the 6th division which is 7/200, the 7th division which is 12/200, the 8th which is 19/200 Judgment value data indicating a plurality of sorting judgment values is set so as to have a plurality of divisions in the order of a division, a ninth division of 15/200, and a tenth division of 35/200. In addition, the jackpot type determination table corresponds to what is included in the "normal" jackpot type that can be determined regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control or the presence or absence of high base control when the specified starting value is "2". The first division is 2/200, the second division is 2/200, the third division is 2/200, the fourth division is 2/200, the fifth division is 1/200, The sixth division is 1/200, and the seventh division is 2/200, in that order, and the determination ratio is 62/200 corresponding to the types of determinable jackpots included in "probability variation". Judgment value data indicating a plurality of sorting judgment values so as to have a plurality of divisions in the order of the eighth division, the ninth division that is 50/200, the tenth division that is 62/200, and the eleventh division that is 14/200. set.

The jackpot type determination table corresponds to the case where the start winning specified value is "1" and "2", regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control or the presence or absence of high base control, multiple divisions with common determination ratio On the other hand, determination value data indicating a plurality of distribution determination values is set so that the assignment of each category to the jackpot type that is the determination result differs depending on the presence or absence of variable probability control and the presence or absence of high base control. Since such a determination ratio has a plurality of divisions in common, it becomes possible to easily design a table used for determining the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced. In addition, since the assignment of each category to the jackpot type as a determination result is different, it is possible to flexibly design the decision ratio of the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the decision example AKD01, when the specified starting value is "1", both the variable probability control and the high base control are "none", so the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA01. The second division with a determination ratio of 44/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA02, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA03, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 is a big hit. The judgment value data is set so as to be assigned to the type NA04, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA01, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA02, The seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA03, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA04, and the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA05. , and the determination value data is set so that the 10th division with a determination ratio of 35/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA06. In addition, when the starting opening winning prize specified value is "1", the variable probability control is "with" and the high base control is "no", so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and a determination ratio of 44/ The judgment value data is set so that the second division of 200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA02, and the third division with the determination ratio of 11/200 and the fourth division with the determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA04. Then, the 5th division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and the 6th division with a determination ratio of 7/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA02, and the 7th division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and a determination ratio of 19/200 The 8th section is assigned to the jackpot type KA04, the 9th section with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA05, and the 10th section with a determination ratio of 35/200 is determined to be assigned to the jackpot type KA06. Value data is set. When the specified value of the starting opening winning prize is "1", the high base control is "Yes" regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control, so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and a determination ratio of 44/200 Judgment value data is set so that the second division, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA08, and the determination ratio is 12/200. The 5th division, the 6th division with a determination ratio of 7/200, the 7th division with a determination ratio of 12/200, and the 8th division with a determination ratio of 19/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA11, and the determination ratio is 15/200. The determination value data is set so that the 9th division of 1 and the 10th division of which the determination ratio is 35/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

In the decision example AKD01, when the specified value of the starting point winning prize is "2", the variable probability control and the high base control are both "none", so that the first division with a decision ratio of 2/200 and a decision ratio of 2/ The second division of 200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA05, the third division with the determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with the determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA06, and the determination ratio is 1/200 The judgment value data is set so that the 5th division, the 6th division with a determination ratio of 1/200, and the 7th division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA07, and the determination ratio is 62/200. The eighth division is assigned to the jackpot type KA07, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA08, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA09, and the determination ratio is The judgment value data is set so that the 11th division of 14/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA10. In addition, when the starting opening winning prize specified value is "2", each division of the determination ratio due to the variable probability control "with" and the high base control "no", both the variable probability control and the high base control ”, and judgment value data is set so as to be assigned to a common jackpot type. When the starting opening winning prize specified value is "2", the high base control is "with" regardless of the presence or absence of variable probability control, so that the first division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and a determination ratio of 2/200 The second division is assigned to the jackpot type NA09, the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA10, and the determination ratio is assigned to the third division with a determination ratio of 1/200. Judgment value data is set so that the 5th division, the 6th division with a determination ratio of 1/200, and the 7th division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA11, and the 8th division with a determination ratio of 62/200 The division is assigned to the jackpot type KA12, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is allocated to the jackpot type KA13, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is allocated to the jackpot type KA14, and the determination ratio is 14/ The judgment value data is set so that the 11th division of 200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

FIG. 9-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS109 of FIG. 9-1 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS221). For example, the hit flag is read, and when the read value is 01 [H], which is the jackpot designation value, it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot". When the special figure display result is "losing" and not "big hit" (step AKS221; No), the start opening winning designation value is read (step AKS222). Along with this, the effect state selection designation value is read (step AKS223). The effect state selection designation value is a value stored in the effect state selection buffer, and can be set to any value from 00[H] to 0D[H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the jackpot type can be set as the production state selection designated value. In addition, when the variable display ends, it is possible to update the effect state selection designation value in response to establishment of a preset update condition. When the game state is the normal state, the effect state selection designation value is set to 00 [H].

After step AKS223, a change pattern type selection table at the time of failure is designated (step AKS224). Loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table used to select the fluctuation pattern type when the special figure display result is "losing", and the start entrance winning designation value read by step AKS222, by step AKS223 It is sufficient if a different table can be designated based on the read effect state selection designated value. Furthermore, if the special figure display result is "losing", a plurality of selectable variation pattern type selection tables may be prepared in advance corresponding to the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories.

When the special figure display result is "big hit" corresponding to step AKS221 (step AKS221; Yes), the big hit type designation value is read (step AKS225). Along with this, the effect state selection designation value is read (step AKS226). Then, the big hit fluctuation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS227). The jackpot time variation pattern type selection table is a table used to select the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "jackpot", and the jackpot type read at step AKS225 and the effect read at step AKS226. It suffices if it is possible to designate a table corresponding to the state selection designation value.

After steps AKS224 and AKS227, the value of random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is read (step AKS228). The data indicating the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type may be stored in the variation pattern type selection buffer included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol buffer. Subsequently, the variation pattern type is selected according to the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type (step AKS229). Next, a fluctuation pattern determination table is specified (step AKS230). At step AKS230, it is sufficient if a different variation pattern determination table can be specified corresponding to the variation pattern type selected at step AKS229. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is read (step AKS231). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be stored in the variation pattern determination buffer included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol corresponding buffer. Further, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the value of the fluctuation pattern determination random number MR5 (step AKS232).

Following step AKS232, command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation is performed (step AKS233). The command transmission setting at the start of variation may include specification of a variation command transmission table and execution of command set processing. The variation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting an effect control command at the start of variation corresponding to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game. For example, the variation command transmission table specified corresponding to the first special game includes, in addition to the top data of the table indicating the number of processes, a performance symbol specification command, a first variation start specification command, and a variation pattern specification command. , contains table data for sending On the other hand, the variation command transmission table specified corresponding to the second special game includes, in addition to the top data of the table specifying the number of processes, a performance symbol specification command, a second variation start specification command, a variation pattern It contains table data for sending specified commands.

After step AKS233, a special symbol variation time is set (step AKS236). Special design fluctuation time shows the variable display time as special figure fluctuation time. A special symbol variation time table is designated to set the special symbol variation time. The special symbol variation time table includes table data for setting time data indicating variable display time such as special symbol variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern. At step AKS236, the designated special symbol variation time table is referred to, and time data development processing is executed to store the time data corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern in the HL register. The time data and the like thus acquired may be set as the variable time data as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer.

After step AKS236, data setting after setting the variation pattern is performed (step AKS237), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. A post-variation pattern setting data table is specified in order to perform data setting after variation pattern setting. The data table after setting the variation pattern includes table data for updating the special symbol process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process. Further, the data table after setting the variation pattern includes table data for updating the stored value of the display buffer during special symbol variation to 01 [H]. The special symbol fluctuating display buffer stores a value designating the display pattern during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol fluctuating display buffer corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a second special symbol fluctuating display buffer corresponding to the special symbol. In step AKS237, the data table after setting the specified variation pattern is referred to, and the data set processing is executed, so that when the first special symbol game is started, the stored value of the display buffer during the first special symbol variation is set to 01. When updating to [H] and starting the second special symbol game, the stored value of the display buffer during the second special symbol variation may be updated to 01 [H]. Alternatively, a random number buffer storing random numbers used for determining the fluctuation pattern may be cleared to initialize the stored values.

FIG. 9-4 shows a configuration example of a loss variation pattern. Loss variation pattern is a variation pattern that can be determined when the special figure display result is "loss". A plurality of variation patterns are different in variable display mode of special figure variation time and production design. The losing variation pattern includes a reach variation pattern that becomes a reach state in the variable display of performance symbols and a non-reach variation pattern that does not become a reach state. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-6 and the variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-9 are included in the non-reach variation patterns, and the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2 -7 and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 are included in the reach variation pattern. The reach variation patterns include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance is executed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 are included in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation patterns PA2-4 to PA2-7, and the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 is included in the super reach variation pattern. The normal reach variation patterns include variation patterns with different effects such as reach effects, such as normal reach NOA, normal reach NOB, and normal reach NOC. The super reach variation patterns include variation patterns with different effects such as reach effects, such as super reach SPA, super reach SPB, super reach SPC, super reach SPD, super reach SPE, and super reach SPF. The reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern, and a high-speed reach variation pattern in which the display result is stopped after a short time in a reach state. For example, the variation pattern PB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-4 is 3500 milliseconds with a short special figure variation time, and is a high-speed reach variation pattern that is a production mode of high-speed reach SRA.

FIG. 9-5 shows a configuration example of a jackpot variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern is a variation pattern that can be determined when the special figure display result is "big hit". In the variable display of the performance symbols by the big win variation pattern, the finalized performance symbols of the big win combination are stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win mode. The big hit variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which a normal reach ready-to-win effect is executed and a variation pattern in which a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is executed, similarly to the ready-to-win change pattern in the losing change pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-5, the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the variation patterns in which the normal reach effect is executed, and the variation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-10 and the variation pattern PB3-3 to PB3-11 are included in the variation patterns in which the super reach effect is executed. The big win variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win performance of normal reach and a ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win are executed, as well as a variation pattern in which fixed performance patterns of big win combinations are stopped and displayed in a short period of time. For example, the variation pattern PB3-1 shown in FIG. 9-5 is 2500 milliseconds, which is an extremely short special figure variation time, and the display result is stopped and displayed without executing the reach production. It is a variation pattern. In addition, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 has a short special figure fluctuation time of 4500 milliseconds, and is a high-speed reach production pattern that is a production form of a high-speed reach SRA in which the display result is stopped after a short time. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows a setting example AKA01 of the reference table for failure. The lost time reference table is a table that is referred to when specifying the lost time variation pattern type selection table in step AKS224 of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-3. A plurality of tables corresponding to the effect state selection designation values should be prepared in advance as reference tables at the time of failure. In the setting example AKA01, one of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 is referred to as the reference table for failure, corresponding to the case where the effect state selection specified value is 00 [H] and the case where it is 06 [H] to 0E [H]. be done. Each of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 designates one of a plurality of tables prepared in advance corresponding to the start entry winning prize designation value, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories as the variation pattern type selection table at the time of failure. It consists of table data that enables

FIG. 9-6(B) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS01. The reference table TS01 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 00[H]. The reference table TS01 includes a table TA10 corresponding to the first reserved memory number of "0" and a table TA11 corresponding to the first reserved memory number of "1" when the start entry winning designation value is "1". , the table TA12 corresponding to the first reserved storage number of "2" and the table TA13 corresponding to the first reserved storage number of "3" can be designated as the fluctuation pattern type selection table at the time of failure. In addition, the reference table TS01 corresponds to the first reserved memory number of "0" and the second reserved memory number of "0" to "3" when the start entry winning designation value is "2". can be designated as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the first reserved memory number "1" to "4" and the second reserved memory number "0" to "3". do. In addition, in step AKS102 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-1, when the number of second pending storage is other than "0", the start opening winning designation value is set to "2", and the second pending The stored number is updated by subtracting 1. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start opening winning designation value is set to "1", and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting one. The upper limits of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are "4". Therefore, in step AKS224 of the variation pattern setting process, when the specified value for the starting point winning prize is "1", the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "3", and the second reserved memory number is " 0”. Also, in step AKS224 of the variation pattern setting process, when the specified starting value is "2", the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "4", and the second reserved memory number is " 0" to "3".

FIG. 9-6(C) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS02. The reference table TS02 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 06 [H] or 0E [H]. The reference table TS02 can designate the table TB10 as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the number of first reserved memories "0" to "3" when the start winning prize designation value is "1". do. In addition, the reference table TS02 corresponds to the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0" when the start entry winning designation value is "2". The table TB21 corresponding to the first reserved memory number "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number "1" to "3" can be designated as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure. do.

FIG. 9-6(D) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS03. The reference table TS03 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 07 [H]. The reference table TS03 can designate the table TB10 as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the number of first reserved memories "0" to "3" when the start winning prize designation value is "1". do. In addition, the reference table TS03 corresponds to the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0" when the start entry winning designation value is "2". The table TB23 corresponding to the first reserved memory number "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number "1" to "3" can be designated as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure. do.

FIG. 9-6(E) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS04. The reference table TS04 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 08[H]. The reference table TS04 can designate the table TB10 as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the first reserved memory number "0" to "3" when the start winning prize designation value is "1". do. In addition, the reference table TS04 corresponds to the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0" when the start entry winning designation value is "2". The table TB25 can be designated as a change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the first reservation memory number "0" to "4" and the second reservation memory number "1" to "3". do.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS05. The reference table TS05 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 09 [H]. The reference table TS05 has a table TB11 that is common regardless of the number of first reserved memories or the number of second reserved memories, depending on whether the specified value for starting winning prize is "1" or "2". Make it possible to specify it as a selection table.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS06. The reference table TS06 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 0A[H]. The reference table TS06 can designate the table TB12 as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure corresponding to the number of first reserved memories "0" to "3" when the start winning prize designation value is "1". do. In addition, the reference table TS06 corresponds to the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0" when the start entry winning designation value is "2". The table TB27 corresponding to the first reserved memory number "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number "1" to "3" can be designated as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure. do.

FIG. 9-7(C) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS07. The reference table TS07 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 0B[H]. The reference table TS07 has a common table TB13 regardless of the number of first reserved memories or the number of second reserved memories, depending on whether the specified value for starting winning prize is "1" or "2". Make it possible to specify it as a selection table. FIG. 9D shows a configuration example of the reference table TS08. The reference table TS08 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 0C[H]. The reference table TS08 has a common table TB14 regardless of the number of first reserved memories or the number of second reserved memories, depending on whether the start winning designation value is "1" or "2". Make it possible to specify it as a selection table. FIG. 9-7(E) shows a configuration example of the reference table TS09. The reference table TS09 is referred to when the effect state selection designation value is 0D[H]. The reference table TS09 has a common table TB15 regardless of the number of first reserved memories or the number of second reserved memories, depending on whether the specified value for starting winning prize is "1" or "2". Make it possible to specify it as a selection table.

FIG. 9-8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot time reference table TS21. The big-hit time reference table TS21 is a table that is referred to when specifying the big-hit time variation pattern type selection table in step AKS227 of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-3. The jackpot time reference table TS21 is composed of table data that allows one of a plurality of tables prepared in advance to be designated as a jackpot time variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the performance state selection designation value and jackpot type. .

When the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H], the jackpot time reference table TS21 corresponds to the jackpot types NA01, NA02, NA05, KA01, KA02, KA07, the table TA30, the jackpot types NA03, NA04, NA06, A selection table TA31 corresponding to KA03, KA04, KA05 and KA08 and a table TA32 corresponding to jackpot types NA07, KA06, KA09 and KA10 can be designated as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of jackpot. In addition, when the production state selection specified value is 00 [H], the game state is a low probability low base state corresponding to the normal state, probability variable control in the probability variable state as a high probability state, and time saving as a high base state High base control in the state is not performed. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the variable probability control and the high base control are "none", one of the jackpot types NA01 to NA06 and the jackpot types KA01 to KA10 is determined. It is possible and is not determined for other jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot time reference table TS21 shows a table that can be specified as a jackpot time variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the jackpot type that can be determined when the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H]. there is Even when the performance state selection designation value is other than 00 [H], a table that can be designated as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of big hit is shown corresponding to the jackpot type that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is the performance state selection designation value. It is

When the performance state selection specified value is 06 [H] or 0E [H], the jackpot time reference table TS21 corresponds to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot types KA11 to KA15, and converts the table TB30 to the jackpot time fluctuation pattern type. Make it possible to specify it as a selection table. In addition, when the performance state selection designation value is 07 [H], the jackpot time reference table TS21 includes a table TB31 corresponding to the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11 and KA12, and a table TB31 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. TB32, table TB33 corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB34 corresponding to jackpot type KA15, can be designated as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of jackpot. Alternatively, when the effect state selection designation value is 08 [H], the jackpot time reference table TS21 is a table TB35 corresponding to jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11 and KA12, and a table corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13. TB36, a table TB37 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and a table TB38 corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 can be designated as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of the jackpot.

The jackpot time reference table TS21 corresponds to jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or jackpot types KA11 to KA14 when the specified value for selection of production state is 09 [H] or 0B [H] or 0C [H] or 0D [H]. Then, the table TB40 and the table TB41 corresponding to the big win type KA15 can be specified as the variation pattern type selection table at the time of the big win. In addition, when the performance state selection designation value is 0A [H], the jackpot time reference table TS21 includes a table TB42 corresponding to the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11 and KA12, and a table TB42 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. TB43, table TB44 corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB45 corresponding to jackpot type KA15 can be designated as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of jackpot. The period during which the effect state selection designation value can be set to any one of 06[H] to 0E[H] is included in the period during which the high base control is performed in the time saving state as the high base state. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", one of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15 can be determined. , It is not determined for other jackpot types. Therefore, the big-hit time reference table TS21 is specified as a big-hit time variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the big-hit type that can be determined when the effect state selection designation value is any one of 06 [H] to 0E [H]. It shows possible tables.

FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10 show configuration examples of tables that can be designated as the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure. Tables that can be specified as the fluctuation pattern type selection table at the time of loss include tables TA10 to TA13, tables TA20 and TA21, tables TB10 to TB15, and tables TB20 to TB27. Each table that can be specified as a change pattern type selection table at the time of loss is composed of table data including determination value data that indicates a distribution determination value for each selectable variation pattern type.

The table TA10 shown in FIG. 9-9(A) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). In the table TA10, a distribution judgment value is set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from among the variation pattern types CA1-1, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3. It consists of judgment value data. The table TA11 shown in FIG. 9-9(B) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). In the table TA11, a distribution judgment value is set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from among the variation pattern types CA1-2, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3. It consists of judgment value data. The table TA12 shown in FIG. 9-9(C) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). In the table TA12, the distribution judgment value is set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from the variation pattern types CA1-3, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, CA2-3. It consists of judgment value data. The table TA13 shown in FIG. 9-9(D) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). In the table TA13, the distribution judgment value is set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from among the variation pattern types CA1-4, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3. It consists of judgment value data. The table TA20 shown in FIG. 9-9(E) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). The table TA20 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CA1-1 can be selected. The table TA21 shown in FIG. 9-9(F) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). The table TA21 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CA1-3 can be selected.

The table TB10 shown in FIG. 9-10(A) can be specified when referring to the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C) or the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6(D). Become. The table TB10 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. The table TB11 shown in FIG. 9-10(B) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS05 shown in FIG. 9-7(A). The table TB11 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-5 can be selected. The table TB12 shown in FIG. 9-10(C) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B). The table TB12 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. The table TB13 shown in FIG. 9-10(D) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS07 shown in FIG. 9-7(C). The table TB13 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-7 can be selected. The table TB14 shown in FIG. 9-10(E) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 9-7(D). The table TB14 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-8 can be selected. The table TB15 shown in FIG. 9-10(F) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 9-7(E). The table TB15 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-9 can be selected.

The table TB20 shown in FIG. 9-10(G) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C). The table TB20 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-2 can be selected. The table TB21 shown in FIG. 9-10(H) can be specified by referring to the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C). The table TB21 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB1-3 can be selected. The table TB22 shown in FIG. 9-10(I) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6(D). The table TB22 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from the variation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1. The table TB23 shown in FIG. 9-10(J) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6(D). The table TB23 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any one of the variation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10(K) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6(E). The table TB24 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from the variation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1. The table TB25 shown in FIG. 9-10(L) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6(E). The table TB25 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from among the variation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1. The table TB26 shown in FIG. 9-10(M) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B). The table TB26 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from the variation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-6, and CB2-2. The table TB27 shown in FIG. 9-10(N) can be designated by referring to the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B). The table TB27 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that any one of the variation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-6, and CB2-2 can be selected.

FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 show configuration examples of tables that can be specified as the variation pattern type selection table at the time of the big hit. Tables that can be specified as the variation pattern type selection table at the time of big hit include tables TA30 to TA32, tables TB30 to TB38, and tables TB40 to TB45. Each table that can be specified as a variation pattern type selection table at the time of a big hit is composed of table data including determination value data indicating a distribution determination value for each selectable variation pattern type.

Each table from the table TA30 shown in FIG. 9-11(A) to the table TA32 shown in FIG. 9-11(C) selects the effect state with reference to the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to the jackpot type when the specified value is 00 [H]. The table TA30 is composed of judgment value data in which distribution judgment values are set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-3 can be selected. The table TA31 is composed of judgment value data in which distribution judgment values are set so that one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 can be selected. The table TA32 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that any variation pattern type can be selected from the variation pattern types CA3-2 to CA3-4.

The table TB30 shown in FIG. 9-11(D) is shown in FIG. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to any jackpot type. The table TB30 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB3-1 can be selected. Each table from table TB31 shown in FIG. 9-11 (E) to table TB34 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to the jackpot type when the specified value is 07 [H]. The table TB31 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. The table TB32 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. The table TB33 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB3-4 can be selected. The table TB34 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB3-5 can be selected. Each table from the table TB35 shown in FIG. 9-11 (I) to the table TB38 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to the jackpot type when the specified value is 08 [H]. The table TB35 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. The table TB36 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. The table TB37 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB3-4 can be selected. The table TB38 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern types CB3-5 can be selected.

The table TB40 shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) and the table TB41 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to the jackpot type in the case of any one of 09 [H], 0B [H], 0C [H] and 0D [H]. The table TB40 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected. The table TB41 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected. Each table from table TB42 shown in FIG. 9-12 (C) to table TB45 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to specify corresponding to the jackpot type when the specified value is 0A[H]. The table TB42 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-3 can be selected. The table TB43 is composed of determination value data in which allocation determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-4 can be selected. The table TB44 is composed of determination value data in which distribution determination values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-5 can be selected. The table TB46 is composed of judgment value data in which distribution judgment values are set so that only the variation pattern type CB4-6 can be selected.

FIGS. 9-13 to 9-16 show determination ratios of variation patterns corresponding to variation pattern types. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-3, one variation pattern is determined by step AKS232 based on the variation pattern determination table specified by step AKS230 corresponding to the variation pattern type selected by step AKS229. It is determined. The variation pattern determination table is composed of table data including determination value data indicating a distribution determination value for each determinable variation pattern.

The variation pattern type CA1-1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) is a variation pattern determination table so that any variation pattern can be determined from among the variation patterns PA1-1, PA1-5, and PA1-6. A sorting judgment value is set by the judgment value data of . For the variation pattern type CA1-2 shown in FIG. 9-13(B), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PA1-2 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CA1-3 shown in FIG. 9-13(C), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PA1-3 can be determined. For the variation pattern types CA1-4 shown in FIG. 9-13(D), the distribution determination value is set according to the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PA1-4 can be determined. The variation pattern type CA1-5 shown in FIG. 9-13 (E) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PA1-5 and PA1-6. A sorting judgment value is set by .

The variation pattern type CA2-1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (F) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that any variation pattern can be determined from the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3. A sorting judgment value is set by . The variation pattern type CA2-2 shown in FIG. 9-13 (G) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5. A sorting judgment value is set by . The variation pattern type CA2-3 shown in FIG. 9-13 (H) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PA2-6 and PA2-7. A sorting judgment value is set by .

The variation pattern type CA3-1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (I) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that any variation pattern can be determined from the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3. A sorting judgment value is set by . The variation pattern type CA3-2 shown in FIG. 9-13 (J) can be determined as one of the variation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7, so that the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table A sorting judgment value is set by . For the variation pattern type CA3-3 shown in FIG. 9-13 (K), the distribution determination value is set according to the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PA3-8 can be determined. The variation pattern type CA3-4 shown in FIG. 9-13 (L) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PA3-9 and PA3-10. A sorting judgment value is set by .

For the variation pattern type CB1-1 shown in FIG. 9-14(A), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-1 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CB1-2 shown in FIG. 9-14(B), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-2 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CB1-3 shown in FIG. 9-14(C), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-3 can be determined. The variation pattern type CB1-4 shown in FIG. 9-14 (D) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. A sorting judgment value is set by . For the variation pattern type CB1-5 shown in FIG. 9-14(E), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-6 can be determined. The variation pattern type CB1-6 shown in FIG. 9-14 (F) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. A sorting judgment value is set by . For the variation pattern type CB1-7 shown in FIG. 9-14 (G), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-7 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 9-14(H), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 9-14(I), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined. The variation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-14 (J) and the variation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 9-14 (K) are any of the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3. The distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined at any time.

For the variation pattern type CB3-1 shown in FIG. 9-15(A), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB3-1 can be determined. The variation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 9-15 (B) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. A sorting judgment value is set by . The variation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15 (C) and the variation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15 (D) are any of the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined at any time. The variation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 9-15 (E) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that any variation pattern can be determined from the variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11. A sorting judgment value is set by .

For the variation pattern type CB4-1 shown in FIG. 9-16(A), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB3-2 can be determined. For the variation pattern type CB4-2 shown in FIG. 9-16(B), the distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that only the variation pattern PB3-9 can be determined. The variation pattern type CB4-3 shown in FIG. 9-16 (C) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined as one of the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. A sorting judgment value is set by . The variation pattern type CB4-4 shown in FIG. 9-16 (D) and the variation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 9-16 (E) are any of the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The distribution determination value is set by the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that it can be determined at any time. The variation pattern type CB4-6 shown in FIG. 9-16 (F) is the determination value data of the variation pattern determination table so that any variation pattern can be determined from the variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11. A sorting judgment value is set by .

FIG. 9-17 shows a setting example AKB01 of the effect symbol designation command. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-3, in the transmission setting of the command at the time of variation start by step AKS233, control is performed so that the effect symbol designation command can be transmitted. For example, when the special figure display result is "big hit", it is made possible to transmit an effect design designation command corresponding to the determination result of the big hit type. For example, corresponding to the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 included in the "normal" jackpot type, the effect pattern designation command is any one of the commands 8C01 [H], 8C02 [H], 8C0B [H], 8C0C [H] is set to In response to the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in "probability variation", the production design designation command is set to one of commands 8C04 [H] to 8C0A [H]. In the performance control board 12, based on the performance design designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is possible to determine the performance symbols constituting the fixed performance symbols.

9-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the counted value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS121). In the special symbol process timer here, at step AKS236 of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-3, the variation time data corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set as the timer initial value. . When the counted value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the counted value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation process ends.

When the timing value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02 [H] which is the value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing. (step AKS123). In addition, special design stop time setting is done (step AKS124). In step AKS124, time data corresponding to a predetermined special symbol stop time such as 500 milliseconds may be set as the special symbol stop time data as the timer initial value of the special symbol process timer. Along with the special symbol stop time setting, the setting for transmitting the effect symbol determination command may be performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step AKS125). The probability variable counter is set to a predetermined probability variable counter initial value corresponding to the establishment of the probability variable control condition when the big hit game state ends. When the variable probability control condition is not established, the count value of the variable probability counter is maintained at "0".

When the count value of the variable probability counter is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS125 (step AKS125; No), the count value of the variable probability counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step ASK126). Then, it is determined whether or not the count value of the variable probability counter after the update has become "0" (step AKS127). When the updated count value is "0" (step AKS127; Yes), data setting is performed at the time of probability variation end (step AKS128). The probability variable end time data setting includes specification of the probability variable end time data table and execution of data set processing. The data table at the end of probability variation should just include clear data for clearing the probability variation flag. As a result, the variable probability flag is cleared and turned off, and the variable probability control in the variable probability state as the high probability state ends.

If the count value of the variable probability counter is "0" corresponding to step AKS125 (step AKS125; Yes), if the count value after updating is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS127 (step AKS127; No) Or, after step AKS128, it is determined whether or not the count value of the time saving counter is "0" (step AKS129). The time saving counter is set to an initial value of the time saving counter predetermined corresponding to the big win type when the big win game state ends.

When the count value of the time saving counter is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS129 (step AKS129; No), the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS130). Then, it is determined whether or not the count value of the time saving counter after the update has become "0" (step AKS131). When the updated count value is "0" (step AKS131; Yes), data setting at the end of working hours is performed (step AKS132). Data setting at the time of the time saving end includes designation|designated of a data table at the time of the time saving end, and execution of a data set process. The data table at the time of the time saving end should just contain the clear data for clearing a time saving flag. As a result, the time saving flag is cleared and turned off, and the high base control in the time saving state as the high base state ends.

If the count value of the time saving counter is "0" corresponding to step AKS129 (step AKS129; Yes), if the count value after updating is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS131 (step AKS131; No) Or, after step AKS132, it is determined whether or not the special period effect specified value is 00 [H] (step AKS133). The special period effect designation value is a value stored in the special period effect buffer, and can be set to any value from 00[H] to 0E[H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the jackpot type and whether or not there is a V prize can be set as a special period effect specified value. When the game state is the normal state, the specified special period effect value is set to 00 [H].

When the special period effect specified value is 00 [H] in response to step AKS133 (step AKS133; Yes), the special symbol variation process ends. On the other hand, when the special period effect specified value is other than 00 [H] (step AKS133; No), the special period effect update setting is performed (step AKS134), and the special symbol variation process ends. At step AKS134, a special period effect setting table is designated in order to perform special period effect update settings. The special period effect setting table includes table data for updating the effect state specified value based on the number of executions of variable display.

FIG. 9-19 shows a configuration example of the special period effect setting table AKT01. In the special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 9-18, in the special period effect update setting of step AKS134, the special period effect setting table AKT01 is referred to, and the effect state selection designation value can be updated. The special period effect setting table AKT01 is composed of table data for setting the effect state selection specified value and the background specifying command in association with the time reduction counter determination value for each special period effect specified value. The time-saving counter judgment value for each special period effect specified value is compared with the count value of the time-saving counter, and if it matches any of the judgment values, the production state selection specified value associated with the judgment value is the production state selection. Command data indicating the background designation command stored in the buffer and associated with the determination value is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like.

For example, when the special period effect specified value is 05 [H], if the count value of the time saving counter matches the time saving counter determination value "63", the effect state selection specified value is updated to 03 [H], and the background Command data indicating a command 9503 [H] is stored as a designated command. Also, in the same case, if the count value of the time saving counter matches the time saving counter determination value "62", the effect state selection specified value is updated to 07 [H] and the command 9506 [H] as the background specifying command. is stored, and if the count value of the time saving counter matches the time saving counter determination value "1", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0C [H] and the background specification command is command 9506 [H ] is stored, and if the count value of the time saving counter matches the time saving counter determination value “0”, the production state selection specified value is updated to 00 [H] and the command 9500 [ H] is stored. In addition, when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the special period effect specified value may be cleared and the value may be initialized to 00 [H]. Thereby, corresponding to completion|finish of the time-saving control in the time-saving state as a high base state, control of the production|presentation state corresponding to a special period can be complete|finished.

FIG. 9-20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the counted value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS141). As for the special symbol process timer here, the timer initial value corresponding to the special symbol stop time is set at step AKS124 of the special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 9-18. When the counted value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the counted value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol variation process ends. This waits until the special symbol stop time elapses.

When the clock value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol display result is "big hit" (step AKS143). When the special figure display result is "jackpot" (step AKS143; Yes), the special figure process code is updated to 08 [H] which is the value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step AKS144). Also, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS145). At this time, the initial value of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the readout result of the jackpot type designation value is set as the initial value in the special symbol process timer (step AKS146). After that, the transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command (step AKS147) and the data setting before opening the big winning opening for the first time (step AKS148) are performed, and the special symbol stop processing is completed. The data setting before the first opening of the big winning mouth includes designation of the data table before the first opening of the big winning mouth and execution of data set processing. The data table before the first opening of the big winning opening includes clear data for clearing various data included in the clear target before the first opening of the big winning opening. The objects to be cleared before the opening of the big winning opening for the first time include a hit flag, a time saving flag, a time saving counter, a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a performance state selection buffer, and a special period performance buffer. Among these, the time saving control in the time saving state as a high base state is completed by clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counter. Further, by clearing the variable probability flag and the variable probability counter, the variable probability control in the variable probability state as the high probability state ends.

In response to step AKS143, when the special figure display result is "losing" and not "big hit" (step AKS143; No), the special figure process code is cleared and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H] (step AKS 149). In addition, data setting is performed after stopping the losing game (step AKS150), and the special symbol stopping process ends. The post-failure stop data setting includes designation of a post-failure stop data table and execution of data setting processing. The post-failure stop data table includes clear data for clearing various data included in the post-failure stop setting clear target. It is sufficient that the setting clear target after the failure stop includes the demonstration display flag and the start opening winning prize designation value. The storage areas corresponding to these are cleared by the data set processing included in the post-loss stop data setting, and the respective stored values and the like are initialized to values corresponding to "0". By clearing the demonstration display flag, in the special symbol normal processing, it is possible to set the command transmission during standby. In addition, in response to the end of the special game, the start opening winning designation value that can specify whether it is the first special game or the second special game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0". ] is initialized.

FIG. 9-21 shows a setting example AKB02 at the start of the jackpot. In the special symbol stop process, based on the jackpot type designation value read out in step AKS145, by setting the data before opening the jackpot for the first time in step AKS148, the maximum number of times the jackpot is opened, the jackpot start designation command, and the jackpot To enable the setting of a start performance time and a jackpot start performance pattern. Incidentally, the jackpot start designation command is set in the transmission setting of step AKS147. The data table before opening the big winning opening for the first time is associated with the jackpot type specified from the jackpot type designation value, the maximum number of times the jackpot is opened, the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot start performance time, and the jackpot start performance pattern. and table data for setting . The data indicating the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening set by the data setting before the first opening of the big winning opening is stored in the maximum number of times opening the big winning opening. The time data corresponding to the jackpot start effect time set by the data setting before opening the big winning opening for the first time is set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer. The jackpot start performance pattern may be set by the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12 or the like based on the combination of the performance symbol designation command and the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

The maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state. In the setting example AKB02 at the start of the jackpot, the maximum number of openings of the jackpot is set to one of "02", "03", "04", "07" and "10" corresponding to the jackpot type. It is possible. Therefore, the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is set to one of 2 rounds, 3 rounds, 4 rounds, 7 rounds and 10 rounds. When the upper limit number of times is 2 rounds of the jackpot game state, it is also called a 2-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is 3 rounds of the jackpot game state, it is also called 3 rounds jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, it is also called 4 rounds jackpot. In the case of a jackpot game state in which the upper limit number of times is 7 rounds, it is also called a jackpot game of 7 rounds. When the upper limit number of times is 10 rounds in the jackpot game state, it is also called 10 rounds jackpot.

In the jackpot start time setting example AKB02, the jackpot start effect time can be set to any one of 100 milliseconds, 7500 milliseconds, 8000 milliseconds and 14000 milliseconds. For example, it is possible to set the jackpot start effect time to 100 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA14. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", one of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15 can be determined. On the other hand, when the high base control is "none", the jackpot types NA08-NA11 and the jackpot types KA11-KA14 are not determined. Therefore, the jackpot start production time is the high base control when the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" during the period when the high base control is performed in the time saving state as the high base state. It can be set to a shorter time than when the special figure display result becomes a "big hit" during the period of the low base state. Alternatively, the jackpot start performance time can be set to 14000 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot type KA15, and the jackpot start time can be set to a time shorter than 14000 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types other than KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", the jackpot type KA15 can be determined at a predetermined rate, and when the high base control is "no", the jackpot type KA15 is determined. never decided. Therefore, the jackpot start production time is the high base control when the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" during the period when the high base control is performed in the time saving state as the high base state. It can be set to a longer time than when the special figure display result becomes a "jackpot" during the period of the low base state.

FIG. 9-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. In the jackpot ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS161). As for the special symbol process timer here, a timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end effect time is set in the special symbol process processing after opening the big winning opening. When the time value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the time value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and the process ends. As a result, the game stands by until the jackpot ending performance time elapses.

When the timing value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS161 (step AKS161; Yes), the special symbol process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] as the initial value (step AKS163). Also, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS164), and the specific area passing flag is confirmed (step AKS165). The specific area passing flag is set to ON state when a game ball passing through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24 corresponding to the execution of the round in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning area 51 and is not detected by the specific area switch 24, the specific area passage flag is maintained in an off state.

After step AKS165, state setting at the end of big win (step AKS166), command transmission setting at the end of big win (step AKS167), data setting at the end of big win (AKS168) are performed, and the process ends. The state setting at the end of the jackpot includes settings related to the game state and production state after the end of the jackpot game state. It suffices if the setting of the counter initial value, the setting of the special period production specified value, the production state selection specified value, and the like are possible. The command transmission setting at the end of the jackpot may include designation of the command table at the end of the jackpot and execution of the command set process. The command table at the end of the big win includes table data for transmitting a performance control command at the time of the end of the big win corresponding to the end of the big win game state. For example, the effect control command at the end of the jackpot may include a jackpot end designation command and a background designation command. The data setting at the end of the jackpot may include designation of the data table at the end of the jackpot and execution of data set processing. The jackpot end time data table includes clear data for clearing various data included in the jackpot end time clear target. The object to be cleared at the end of the jackpot may include a demonstration display flag, a variable command designation buffer, a buffer for the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening, a start opening winning designation value, and the like. The storage areas corresponding to these are cleared by the data setting process included in the data setting at the end of the jackpot, and the respective stored values and the like are initialized to values corresponding to "0".

FIG. 9-23 shows a setting example AKB11 at the end of the jackpot. A setting example AKB11 at the end of a big win makes it possible to set an initial value of a time-saving counter, a performance time for ending a big win, and a designated value for selecting a performance state corresponding to a kind of a big win when a big win game state ends. The initial value of the time-saving counter can be set by setting the state at the end of the jackpot in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The jackpot end effect time and the effect state selection specified value may be set with the update of the special figure process code in the big winning opening opening post-processing selected by the special symbol process process.

The time saving counter initial value corresponds to the upper limit number of times of variable display that can be executed in the time saving state as the high base state. In the setting example AKB11 at the end of the jackpot, the initial value of the time saving counter can be set to one of ``8'', ``70'', ``100'', ``570'' and ``10000'' corresponding to the jackpot type. . Therefore, the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving state as the high base state is set to one of 8 times, 70 times, 100 times, 570 times, and 10000 times.

The probability variable counter initial value can be set to "70" when the specific area passage flag is on corresponding to the V winning. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is off corresponding to no V winning, the probability variable counter initial value is set to "0". Therefore, the upper limit number of variable display that can be executed in the variable probability state as the high probability state is set to 70 times based on the establishment of the variable probability control condition due to the occurrence of the V prize in the big hit game state.

When the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving state as the high base state is set to a common number when compared with the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the probability variable state as the high probability state, There are cases where different numbers are set. For example, when the initial value of the time saving counter is set to "8", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be performed in the time saving state is 70 times, which is the upper limit number of variable displays that can be performed in the variable probability state. times. On the other hand, when the initial value of the time saving counter is set to either "570" or "10000", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving state is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the probability variable state. It becomes 570 times or 10000 times, which is more than the upper limit of 70 times. On the other hand, when the initial value of the time saving counter is set to "70", the upper limit number of variable displays executable in the time saving state is common to 70 times, which is the upper limit number of variable displays executable in the variable probability state. number of times.

"70", which is the initial value of the probability variable counter that can be set in response to the control of the variable probability state, is also included in the initial value of the time-saving counter that can be set in response to the control of the time-saving state, and variable display is performed in the first state. This is the first executable number. When the probability variable counter initial value and the time reduction counter initial value are set to "70", the high probability high base state in which the high base control is performed along with the probability variable control is the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game state. The controllable first state is maintained until the variable display is performed once. In the setting example AKB11 at the end of the jackpot, when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to one of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 or the jackpot types KA02, KA04 to KA15, the probability variable counter initial value and the time reduction counter initial value are set. It is set to "70", and after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state. However, in a jackpot game state corresponding to one of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 included in the "normal" jackpot type, the V winning opening opening/closing member is used so that the game ball does not easily pass through the V winning area 51. Operation of the distribution member is controlled.

"10000" included in the time saving counter initial value that can be set corresponding to the control of the time saving state is the second number of times that the variable display can be performed in the second state. Therefore, when the probability variable counter initial value is set to "0" and the time reduction counter initial value is set to "10000", the low probability high base state in which high base control is performed without probability variable control is a jackpot game state that is an advantageous state After the end of , the controllable second state is maintained until the variable display is executed more than the first number of times. In the setting example AKB11 at the end of the big win, when there is no V prize in the big win game state corresponding to one of the big win types NA09 to NA11, the initial value of the time saving counter is set to "10000", and after the big win game state ends. It is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state. Here, since the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 are included in the "normal" jackpot types, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 51 in the jackpot game state, and the probability variable counter initial value becomes "0" at a high rate.

In the jackpot end time setting example AKB11, the jackpot end effect time can be set to any one of 3500 milliseconds, 9500 milliseconds and 48000 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, it is possible to set the jackpot end effect time to 3500 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", one of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15 can be determined. On the other hand, when the high base control is "none", the big hit types NA08 to NA11 and the big hit types KA11 to KA14 are never determined. Therefore, the jackpot end production time is higher base control is performed when the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" in the period when high base control is performed in the time saving state as high base state It can be set to a shorter time than when the special figure display result becomes a "big hit" during the period of the low base state.

In the setting example AKB11 at the end of the jackpot, the effect state selection designation value can be set to either 02 [H] or 06 [H] corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, corresponding to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15, the effect state selection designation value can be set to 06 [H]. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit types NA01 to NA07 and the big hit types KA01 to KA10, there are cases where the effect state selection designated value is set to 02 [H] and 06 [H]. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", one of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA15 can be determined. On the other hand, when the high base control is "none", the big hit types NA08 to NA11 and the big hit types KA11 to KA14 are never determined. Therefore, when the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" in the period of the low-base state in which the high-base control is not performed, the effect state selection designated value corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state is set as the high-base state. When the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" in the period when high base control is performed in the time saving state, it may be set to the same value or may be set to a different value.

FIG. 9-24 shows a setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot. A setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot, when the jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type NA01 ~ which includes the jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value, and the background designation after the jackpot in the "normal" jackpot type. It can be set corresponding to NA11. The jackpot end designation command can be set by command transmission setting at the time of jackpot end in step AKS167 of the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 9-22. The special period effect specified value can be set by setting the state at the end of the jackpot in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The post-jackpot background specification can be set by setting data at the end of the jackpot in step AKS168 of the jackpot end processing, and command data indicating the background specification command is stored in a background specification command buffer or the like. In addition, the background specification command corresponding to the background specification after the big win may be set to be able to be transmitted by the command transmission setting at the end of the big win in step AKS167 of the big win end processing.

For example, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, a command A300 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 01 [H], and the background after the jackpot. Command data indicating a command 9502 [H] is stored as a specified background specifying command. On the other hand, when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, a command A300 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 02 [H], and a jackpot is won. Command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as a background designating command for designating a background. Further, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA02, a command A301 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 03 [H], and the background after the jackpot. Command data indicating a command 9502 [H] is stored as a specified background specifying command. On the other hand, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA02, a command A307 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 04 [H], and a jackpot is won. Command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as a background designation command for designating a background. Settings corresponding to other types of jackpots and presence/absence of V prizes are as shown in FIG. 9-24.

FIG. 9-25 shows a setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot. The setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot includes the jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value, and the background designation after the jackpot when the jackpot game state ends. It can be set corresponding to KA15. For example, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, a command A300 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 01 [H], and the background after the jackpot. Command data indicating a command 9502 [H] is stored as a background specifying command to be specified. On the other hand, when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, a command A300 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 02 [H], and the jackpot is won. Command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as a background designating command for designating a background. Further, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, a command A302 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period effect designation value is set to 06 [H], and the background after the jackpot. Command data indicating a command 9503 [H] is stored as a background specifying command to be specified. On the other hand, when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, a command A302 [H] is transmitted as a jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 05 [H], and the jackpot is won. Command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as a background designation command for designating a background. Settings corresponding to other types of jackpots and presence/absence of V prizes are as shown in FIG. 9-25.

FIG. 9-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance symbol variation start process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final effect symbol as a display result of the effect symbols (step AKS501). The effect control CPU 120 is based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result corresponding to the jackpot type identifiable from the effect pattern designation command. , the final stop symbol may be determined. As an example, variable display contents corresponding to combinations of variable patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

According to the production design designation command setting example AKB01 shown in FIG. 9-17 and the jackpot start time setting example AKB02 shown in FIG. 9-21, each production design designation command can notify the following determination contents. is. In the case of command 8C01 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and the 3-round big win is obtained, and in the case of command 8C02 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and the 3-round or 4-round jackpot is obtained, In the case of command 8C03 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and 2 rounds are hit, and in the case of command 8C04 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and 3 rounds are hit, and command 8C05 [H]. ], the jackpot type is included in the ``probability variation'', resulting in a 3-round or 4-round jackpot, and in the case of command 8C06 [H], the jackpot type is included in the ``probability variation'', resulting in a 7-round jackpot. In addition, in the case of command 8C07 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and becomes a 10-round big hit, and in the case of command 8C08 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and becomes a 10-round big win, and command 8C09. In the case of [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and becomes a 3-round big hit, and in the case of command 8C0A [H], the jackpot type is included in "probability variation" and becomes a 3-round big hit, and command 8C0B [H]. In the case of command 8C0C[H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and the jackpot type is included in "normal", resulting in a 7-round jackpot.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display of the production pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed production pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is " Lost.” When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the finalized production pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". Become. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the V prize is less likely to occur in the big win game state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the V prize is likely to occur in the big win game state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", different (mismatched) performance symbols in the "left" and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5R are determined as final stop symbols. When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the same (matching) effect symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In this case, among the confirmed effect symbols, the medium confirmed effect pattern stopped and displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined to be a different effect pattern from the left and right confirmed effect symbols. be done. If the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", the same ( (matching) is determined as the final stop symbol. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the production design showing) and the probability variation design (for example, the production design showing an odd number) to be the fixed production design. In the promotion performance during the big win, a combination of performance symbols (non-probability variable big win combination) that reminds of the big win but not the probability variable state is temporarily displayed on the image display device 5, and then during the big win game state or the big win game state. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a fixed performance symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. When it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big win)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed performance pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variation (big win)'', the fixed performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of the variable probability symbols as the fixed performance symbols, so as not to make the player feel distrustful.

After determining the final stop pattern and the like in step AKS501, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is for result display (step AKS502). In the variable probability state and the time saving state, when the number of execution times of the variable display reaches 70 times, the result display can be executed. The result display is a display of information related to the game value obtained by the player, such as the total number of prize balls won by the player in the jackpot game state, the number of consecutive jackpots, and the like. The number of consecutive big wins is also called the number of consecutive games. In the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, during the execution of the variable display by any one of the variation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 from the first final to the fourth final during the time saving, the result display and perform value notification to notify the result of the value acquired by the player. In the jackpot variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-5, when the variable display by either the variation pattern PB3-2 or the variation pattern PB3-9 is the 70th variable display in the probability variable state or the time saving state, the variable During execution of the display, it may be possible to display a result and execute value notification for informing the result of the value obtained by the player. In step AKS502, in the case of the 70th variable display in the probability variable state or time saving state, the variation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 and the variation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, corresponding to the result display for It is sufficient to determine that it is a variation pattern. Note that the value announcement may include providing information regarding any value obtained by the player.

In response to step AKS502, if it is a variation pattern for result display (step AKS502; Yes), result display control setting is performed (step AKS503). The result display control setting is a setting for controlling execution of the result display as the value notification during execution of the variable display. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select an effect pattern provided for the result display, and set the result display to be executable during execution of the variable display.

After step AKS503, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is for the state notification effect (step AKS504). When the result display is performed while the variable display is being performed, the state notification effect may or may not be performed. In the state notification effect, when the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time saving state is 10000 times, the time saving state continues even after the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 70 times. It is an effect that executes notification that it is in a low probability height base state. In the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, the state notification effect is performed during the execution of the variable display by the fourth and final variation pattern PB1-9 during the time saving, and the upper limit of the executable variable display is 10000 times. It is possible to execute the notification that it is in the time saving state. In step AKS504, it may be determined that the variation pattern is for the state notification effect corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9.

When it is a variation pattern for state notification effect corresponding to step AKS504 (step AKS504; Yes), state notification effect control setting is performed (step AKS505). The state notification effect control setting is a setting for enabling execution of notification by the state notification effect during execution of the variable display. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select an effect pattern provided for the state notification effect and set the state notification effect to be executable during execution of the variable display. The state notification effect may include display of a specific image such as a button display effect image imitating the push button 31B, for example.

If it is not a variation pattern for result display corresponding to step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), if it is not a variation pattern for state neglect effect corresponding to step AKS504 (step AKS504; No), or following step AKS505, Other effects during variable display are determined (step AKS506). For example, the presence or absence of the notice effect, the notice effect pattern in the case of execution, and the like may be determined. After that, the production control pattern is determined (step AKS507). For example, the production control CPU120 selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and as a usage pattern set. Also, the effect control CPU 120 may select a previously prepared effect control pattern (result display control pattern) corresponding to execution of the result display and set it as a use pattern. A prepared effect control pattern (state notification effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a usage pattern corresponding to the execution of the state notification effect. An effect control pattern prepared in advance (announcement effect control pattern) may be selected and set as a usage pattern corresponding to execution of the foretelling effect. It should be noted that the effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation, the result display control pattern, the state notification effect control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, or as a part or all of these, it is not limited to those that set a separate effect control pattern, One effect control pattern may be set corresponding to a combination of execution settings of each effect.

Next to step AKS507, for example corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the initial value of the production control process timer is set (step AKS508). The effect control process timer is provided, for example, at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and can store and store data indicating a time value used for effect control. In addition, the setting for starting the variation of the production pattern and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step AKS509). At this time, for example, using the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern) determined by step AKS507, "left", "middle" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 , , and "right", the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be used to start the variation of the effect symbols. Along with this, settings are made for updating the pending display on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the start of the variable display (step AKS510). Then, the effect process code is updated to 02[H] corresponding to the process during effect symbol change (step AKS511), and the effect symbol change start process ends.

FIG. 9-27 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during effect symbol fluctuation. In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has passed, for example, based on the time value of the effect control process timer. step AKS521). In order to measure the variable display time, update such as updating by subtracting 1 from the counted value of the effect control process timer is performed. In step AKS521, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed when, for example, an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the counted value of the effect control process timer after the update.

When the variable display time has not elapsed corresponding to step AKS521 (step AKS521; No), it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step AKS522). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (such as the notice effect control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. When it is the notice effect period (step AKS522; Yes), control to execute the notice effect is performed (step AKS523).

If it is not the announcement performance period corresponding to step AKS522 (step AKS522; No), after the control of step AKS523, it is determined whether or not it is the result display period (step AKS524). The result display period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (result display control pattern, etc.) determined in step AKS507 of the effect symbol variation start process. If it is the result display period (step AKS524; Yes), control is performed to execute the result display (step AKS525). If it is not the result display period (step AKS524; No), after the control by step AKS525, it is determined whether or not it is the state notification effect period (step AKS526). The state notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (state notification effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step AKS507 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. If it is the state notification effect period (step AKS526; Yes), control to execute the state notification effect is performed (step ASK527). By performing the control of step AKS525 in this way, it is possible to execute the result display as the value notification during the variable display. In addition, by performing the control of step AKS527, it is possible to execute the state notification effect including the notification of the low probability high base state as the second state during the variable display.

Corresponding to step AKS526, when it is not the state notification effect period (step AKS526; No), after control by step AKS527, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS528). The ready-to-win effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern (such as the special figure change effect control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the effect symbol variation start process, for example. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS528; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step AKS529). If it is not a reach effect period (step AKS528; No), after the control by step AKS529, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, other, including the variable display operation of the effect pattern Control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display (step AKS530), and the process during effect symbol variation ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed corresponding to step AKS521 (step AKS521; Yes), it is determined whether or not the production design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step AKS531). At this time, if there is no reception of the performance symbol determination command (step AKS531; No), the processing during performance symbol fluctuation is terminated and waits. In addition, after the variable display time has passed, in response to the passage of a predetermined time without receiving the production design confirmation command, it is assumed that the production design confirmation command could not be received normally, and the prescribed error processing is executed. may be made. When the production design determination command is received (step AKS531; Yes), the final stop design, which is the display result in the variable display of the production design, is controlled to be derived and displayed as a stop display (step AKS532). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a command to start a big hit (step AKS533). Then, the effect process code is updated to 03[H] corresponding to the effect symbol change stop processing (step AKS534), and the effect symbol change process is terminated.

Next, various control examples regarding the characteristic portion 23AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, a special symbol game using a first special symbol is executed during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is performed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". . Such a big hit is also referred to as a high base medium first special figure big hit. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. It is determined to be one of the jackpot types KA11 and KA15 included in "Variable Probability". In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the jackpot type NA08, the time reduction counter initial value “570” and the production state selection specified value 06 [H] are set, and the jackpot types KA11 and KA15 are set. In this case, the time saving counter initial value "70" and the production state selection specified value 06 [H] are set. Also, since the jackpot type NA08 whose jackpot type is included in "normal" is unlikely to generate a V prize, in the setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-24, if there is no V prize of the jackpot type NA08 The specified effect value is set to 0C[H]. On the other hand, since the jackpot types KA11 and KA15 whose jackpot types are included in the "probability variation" are likely to generate V prizes, in the setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. If there is a prize, the specified value for the special period effect is set to 07 [H].

FIG. 9-28 shows a production state control example AKC01 based on the first special figure jackpot in high base. When the first special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type NA08, the special performance period specified value is set to 0C [H] corresponding to no V prize, the initial value of the time reduction counter is set to "570", and the performance is performed. The state selection designation value is set to 06[H]. After that, corresponding to the end of the variable display, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 by step AKS130 of the special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 9-18. Along with this, it is determined at step AKS133 that the specified value for the special period effect is other than 00 [H], and the special period effect update setting is performed at step AKS134. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 0C [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 08 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "566". When the count value of the time saving counter reaches ``501'', the effect state selection specified value is updated to 09 [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter reaches ``500'', the effect state selection specified value changes to 0A [H]. When the count value of the time saving counter becomes "1", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0B [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the production state selection specified value becomes 00 [H]. Updated and initialized.

When the first special figure jackpot in high base is either jackpot type KA11 or KA15, the special period production specified value is set to 07 [H] corresponding to the V prize, and the initial value of the time saving counter is "70". ”, and the effect state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 corresponding to the end of the variable display, and the special period effect update setting is performed. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 07 [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 07 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "66". When the count value of the time saving counter becomes "1", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0C [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the production state selection specified value becomes 00 [H]. Updated and initialized.

In the losing time reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6(A), a reference table corresponding to the effect state selection designation value is designated, and a variation pattern can be determined using a different reference table. For example, when the effect state selection designation value is 06[H], the reference table TS02 is designated, when the effect state selection designation value is 07[H], the reference table TS03 is designated, and the effect state selection designation value is 09[H]. H], the reference table TS05 is designated, the reference table TS06 is designated when the effect state selection designation value is 0A [H], and the reference table TS07 is designated when the effect state selection designation value is 0B [H]. and the reference table TS08 is designated when the effect state selection designation value is 0C[H]. In the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the start entry winning designation value is "2", one of the selection tables TB20 and TB21 associated with the second reserved storage number is selected as a variation pattern. It can be specified as a type selection table. In the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when the start entry winning designation value is "2", either of the selection tables TB22 and TB23 associated with the second reserved storage number is changed to a variation pattern. It can be specified as a type selection table. In this way, a variation pattern can be determined using a variation pattern type selection table or the like configured by different table data corresponding to the effect state selection designation value.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a special symbol game using a second special symbol is executed during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is performed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". . Such a big hit is also called a second special figure big hit in a high base. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 whose jackpot types are included in "normal" and the jackpot types KA12 to which the jackpot types are included in "variable". and KA15. In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the time reduction counter initial value "10000" and the production state selection specified value 06 [H] are set, and the jackpot types KA12 to In the case of KA15, the time saving counter initial value "70" and the production state selection designated value 06 [H] are set. In addition, since the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 included in the "normal" jackpot types are less likely to generate V prizes, there is no V prize for the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 in the setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-24. Then, the specified value for special period effect is set to 0E[H]. On the other hand, since the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in the "probability variation" are likely to generate V prizes, in the setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. If there is a prize, the specified value for the special period effect is set to 07 [H].

FIG. 9-29 shows a production state control example AKC02 based on the second special figure jackpot in high base. When the high-base middle second special figure jackpot is a jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special effect period specified value is set to 0E [H] corresponding to no V prize, and the time reduction counter initial value is set to "10000". , the effect state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 corresponding to the end of the variable display, and the special period effect update setting is performed. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 0E [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 08 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9996". When the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9931", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0D [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9930", the production state selection specified value changes to 0E [H]. When it is updated and the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special period production specified value is set to 07 [H] corresponding to the V prize, and the time reduction counter initial value is set to "70". , the effect state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 corresponding to the end of the variable display, and the special period effect update setting is performed. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 07 [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 07 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "66". When the count value of the time saving counter becomes "1", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0C [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the production state selection specified value becomes 00 [H]. Updated and initialized.

Based on the fact that the second special figure jackpot in the high base was the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, it is controlled to the low probability high base state, and when the 69th variable display is completed, the count value of the time saving counter is "9931". is updated to As a result, the production state selection specified value is updated to 0D [H], and when the 70th variable display is subsequently started, the special figure display result corresponds to "losing", and is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A ), the reference table TS09 is specified in the lost reference table AKA01. The reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 9-7 (E) makes it possible to designate the table TB15 as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the starting opening winning prize designation value, the number of first reserved memories, and the number of second reserved memories. . Table TB15 shown in FIG. 9-10(F) allows selection of only variation pattern types CB1-9. In the case of the variation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 9-14 (I), only the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined. In this way, it is possible to determine the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponding to the 70th variable display in the low-probability-high base state in which the initial value of the time saving counter is "10000".

Based on the fact that the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, it is controlled to a high-probability high-base state, and when the 69th variable display is completed, the count value of the time-saving counter is "1". is updated to As a result, the effect state selection specified value is updated to 0C [H], and when the 70th variable display is subsequently started, the special figure display result corresponds to "losing", and is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A ), the reference table TS08 is specified in the lost reference table AKA01. The reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 9-7 (D) makes it possible to designate the table TB14 as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the starting entry winning prize designation value, the number of first reserved memories, and the number of second reserved memories. . The table TB14 shown in FIG. 9-10(E) allows selection of only the variation pattern types CB1-8. In the case of the variation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 9-14(H), only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined. In this way, the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined corresponding to the 70th variable display on the high-precision high base with the initial value of the time saving counter being "70".

FIG. 9-30(A) shows a variable display control example AKC11 corresponding to the effect state selection designation values 0C[H] and 0D[H]. When the production state selection specified value is 0C [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special figure display result is "losing", only the variation pattern type CB1-8 can be determined, and only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined. In the configuration example of the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation pattern PB1-8 is set to 12500 milliseconds for special figure variation time corresponding to the third final during time saving. On the other hand, when the effect state selection specified value is 0D [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special figure display result is "losing", the variation pattern type Only CB1-9 can be determined, and only variation patterns PB1-9 can be determined. In the configuration example of the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation pattern PB1-9 is set to 29900 milliseconds for the special figure variation time corresponding to the fourth final during the time saving.

In step AKS502 of the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 9-26, it is determined that both of the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 are variation patterns for result display, and result display control is performed in step AKS503. Settings are made. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the processing during effect symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. results can be displayed. In addition, in step AKS504 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 9-26, it is determined that the variation pattern PB1-9 is the state notification effect variation pattern, and the state notification effect control setting is performed by step AKS505. will be Based on this setting, in step AKS527 of the effect symbol fluctuation process shown in FIG. Notification of the definite height base state is executed.

As described above, the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state in which the special game using the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the normal state by the high base control are, for example, jackpots corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. After the end of the game state, the time-saving counter initial value corresponds to 70 times variable display corresponding to ``70'' as the first number of times, controllable high base state and jackpot types NA09 to NA11. A low probability high base state that can be controlled until 10000 times variable display corresponding to ``10000'' as a second number of times greater than the first number of times after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. . The high-probability-high base state at this time corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability-high base state corresponds to the second state. Of these, the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined corresponding to the number of times the variable display is executed during the high probability high base state is "70" as the first number, and the variable display during the low probability high base state is "70" as the first number of executions, the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined. The variation pattern PB1-8 at this time corresponds to the first variable display pattern, and the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponds to the second variable display pattern. Then, during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-8, the result display as the value notification is executed. In addition, the state notification effect including the notification regarding the result display and the low-probability/low-probability base state, which becomes the value notification during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-9, is executed. Here, when comparing the special figure fluctuation time, 29900 milliseconds in the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 is longer than 12500 milliseconds in the fluctuation pattern PB1-8. As a result, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponding to the first variable display pattern and the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponding to the second variable display pattern are made different in the special figure variation time and the notification content, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display. can be improved.

In addition, in the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, when the number of times of variable display is "70" as the first number, respectively A variation pattern can be determined using table data of a variation pattern determination table, which is different determination data corresponding to variation pattern types CB1-8 and variation pattern types CB1-9. In this way, since the variation pattern is determined using different determination data, the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number of times is appropriately executed, and the game interest related to the variable display can be improved.

In the variable display control example AKC11, when the number of executions of variable display in the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state is "70" as the first number, the special figure display result corresponds to "loss" The determinable variation pattern PB1-8 corresponds to the first non-specific pattern. In addition, when the number of executions of the variable display in the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state is "70" as the first number, the special figure display result is a variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to "loss" PB1-9 correspond to the second non-specific pattern. Then, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponding to the first non-specific pattern has a special figure variation time of 12500 milliseconds, and the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponding to the second non-specific pattern has a special figure variation time of 2 times or more. The period is 29900 milliseconds. Since both of the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 are variation patterns for result display, the result display as value notification is executed during each variable display. Furthermore, in the case of the variation pattern PB1-9, since it is a variation pattern for state notification effect, notification to the effect that it is a low probability high base state as the second state is executed during the variable display. As a result, the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number of times can be appropriately executed, and the amusement of the game related to the variable display can be improved.

FIG. 9-30(B) shows a jackpot control example AKC12 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In the setting example AKB02 at the start of the big win shown in FIG. "07" corresponding to the type NA11, "02" corresponding to the jackpot type KA12, "04" corresponding to the jackpot type KA13, "07" corresponding to the jackpot type KA14, and jackpot type KA15. are respectively set to "10" corresponding to . In addition, in the setting example AKB11 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-23, the initial value of the time saving counter is "10000" corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and "70" corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. , respectively. The time saving counter initial value is set to "10000" only in the case of one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and is not set for the other jackpot types. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, it corresponds to "Yes" in which high base control is performed and the specified value "2" in which the special game using the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. On the other hand, it is not determined to the big hit types NA09 to NA11 corresponding to "none" in which the high base control is not performed and the specified start winning prize value "2". In addition, when the high base control is "no" and "yes", the special figure game using the first special symbol is executed. ~ Not determined to NA11.

As described above, based on the fact that the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special symbol has become a "jackpot" during the high base such as the time saving state in which the high base control is performed, the initial time saving counter The value may be controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state corresponding to the setting of "10000". On the other hand, based on the fact that the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special symbol is "big hit" during the low base period in which the high base control is not performed, the low base as the second state There is no case of being controlled to a fixed height base state. In addition, based on the fact that the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "jackpot" in the case of high base and the case of low base, low probability as the second state There is no case of being controlled to a high base state. In this way, the presence or absence of the high-base control and the control corresponding to the special symbol whose display result is "big win" can improve the game interest related to the variable display.

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum value of the jackpot opening count is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot type KA15. In the case of other jackpot types NA09-NA11 and jackpot types KA12-KA14, the maximum value of the number of openings of the jackpot is less than "10". The jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 are set to "Yes" where high base control is performed and "2" where the special game using the second special symbol is executed. Correspondingly determinable. In this way, it is possible to control based on the fact that the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special symbol has become a "jackpot" during the high base such as the time saving state in which the high base control is performed. The jackpot game state includes a first jackpot game state corresponding to a jackpot type KA15 with a 10-round jackpot, and a second jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA14 with a smaller number of rounds than the 10-round jackpot. and a jackpot gaming state. After the end of the first jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15, the initial value of the time-saving counter may be controlled to a high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and the initial value of the time-saving counter is There is no case of being controlled to the low probability height base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". On the other hand, after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA14, the time reduction counter initial value is a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70". There is a case where the time saving counter initial value is controlled to a low probability high base state as a second state based on the setting of "10000". As a result, in the case of the second jackpot game state with a small number of rounds, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by being controlled to a low-probability base state with a large initial value of the time-saving counter as the second state. At the same time, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot type KA15, and the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening is set to "07" in the jackpot type. This is the case of NA11 and KA14, and the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is set to "04" in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Of these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the first jackpot game state. Corresponding to the big winning game state, the big winning game state in the case of the big winning types NA10 and KA13 corresponds to the third big winning game state in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the second big winning game state. The jackpot types NA10 and NA11 and the jackpot types KA13 to KA15 are all set to "Yes" where high base control is performed and the specified value "2" where the special game using the second special symbol is executed. Correspondingly determinable. In this way, it is possible to control based on the fact that the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special symbol has become a "jackpot" during the high base such as the time saving state in which the high base control is performed. The jackpot game state includes a first jackpot game state corresponding to a jackpot type KA15 with a 10-round jackpot, and a second jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14 with a 7-round jackpot with a smaller number of rounds than the 10-round jackpot. state, and a third jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13 in which the number of rounds is less than that of the jackpot of seven rounds, which is a jackpot of four rounds. After the end of the first jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15, the initial value of the time-saving counter may be controlled to a high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and the initial value of the time-saving counter is There is no case of being controlled to the low probability height base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". On the other hand, after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10, NA11 and the jackpot types KA13, KA14, the time reduction counter initial value is set to "70". There is a case where the time saving counter initial value is controlled to a low probability high base state as a second state based on the setting of "10000". Then, the high-base medium determination rate of the jackpot type KA13 is 25%, which is lower than the high-base medium determination rate of 31% of the jackpot type KA14. On the other hand, the high-base middle decision rate of the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 are both 2%. Therefore, after the third big win game state corresponding to the 4-round big win, the initial value of the time saving counter is "10000" as the second state at a higher rate than after the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win. It is possible to control to the low probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of . As a result, in the case of the third jackpot game state with a small number of rounds, the ratio of being controlled to the low-probability base state with a large initial value of the time-saving counter as the second state increases, thereby reducing the disadvantage of the player. In addition to preventing this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

In the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8, when the effect state selection designation value is 07 [H], if either the jackpot type NA10 or KA13, the table TB32 is designated as the variation pattern type selection table. If it is one of the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, the table TB33 is designated as the variation pattern type selection table. The table TB32 shown in FIG. 9-11(F) allows selection of only the variation pattern type CB3-3. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 9-11 (G) allows selection of only variation pattern types CB3-4. In this way, corresponding to the jackpot type NA10 and the jackpot type KA13, when the 4-round jackpot is achieved, using the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15 (C) A variation pattern is determined. Also, corresponding to the jackpot type NA11 and the jackpot type KA14, when the 7-round jackpot is achieved, using the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the fluctuation A pattern is determined. Therefore, after the end of the second jackpot gaming state corresponding to the 7-round jackpot, when it is controlled to the high-probability-high base state as the first state and when it is controlled to the low-probability-high base state as the second state, A fluctuation pattern can be determined using table data constituting a fluctuation pattern determination table in common fluctuation pattern types CB3-4. In addition, after the end of the third jackpot gaming state corresponding to the 4-round jackpot, when it is controlled to the high-probability-high base state as the first state and when it is controlled to the low-probability-high base state as the second state, A fluctuation pattern can be determined using table data constituting a fluctuation pattern determination table in the common fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Here, the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 corresponds to the first data, and the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 corresponds to the second data. . In this way, by determining the variation pattern using data corresponding to the common variation pattern type, it is possible to increase the commonality of the variable display and recognize whether it will be a high probability base state or a low probability height base state By making it difficult to display, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-30(C) shows a big hit performance control example AKC13 corresponding to the big hit types NA09 to NA11 and the big hit types KA12 to KA15. In the jackpot effect control example AKC13, as in the jackpot control example AKC12, the number of times the jackpot is opened is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot type KA15, and the number of times the jackpot is opened is set to "07". It is set for the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and the number of times of opening the jackpot is set to "04" for the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Of these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the first jackpot game state. Corresponding to the big winning game state, the big winning game state in the case of the big winning types NA10 and KA13 corresponds to the third big winning game state in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the second big winning game state. In the setting example AKB02 at the start of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-21, the jackpot start production pattern is a common pattern APA33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and a common pattern APA34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. , respectively. Therefore, when the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win is started, after the big win game state is ended, it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state, and the end of the big win game state. It is possible to execute the big win start performance by the common big win start performance pattern APA34 in the case where it is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state later. In addition, when a third big win game state corresponding to a four-round big win is started, after the big win game state is ended, it is controlled to a high probability high base state as a first state, and the end of the big win game state. It is possible to execute the big win start performance by the common big win start performance pattern APA33 in the case where it is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state later. In this way, by executing the big win start performance according to the common big win start performance pattern, it is made difficult to recognize whether the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state occurs when the big win start performance is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

In the big win performance control example AKC13, the big win middle performance pattern is set to a common pattern APB33 corresponding to the big win types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APB34 corresponding to the big win types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, in the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win, when the high probability high base state is controlled as the first state after the big win game state is finished, and when the big win game state is finished as the second state. In the case of being controlled to the low probability high base state, it is possible to execute the production during the big win by the common production pattern during the big win APB34. In addition, in the third big win game state corresponding to the 4-round big win, after the big win game state is ended, it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state, and after the big win game state is ended, it is controlled to the second state. In the case of being controlled to the low probability high base state, it is possible to execute the production during the big win by the common production pattern during the big win APB33. The middle-big-win performance by the middle-big-win performance pattern APB33 and the middle-big-win performance by the middle-big-win performance pattern APB34 may include performances executed corresponding to the rounds executable corresponding to the respective big-win game states. Therefore, when the round in the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win is executed, after the big win game state is finished, it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state, and the big win game state. After the end of , it is possible to execute the during-big-hit performance by the common during-big-hit performance pattern APB34 in the case of being controlled to the low probability-high base state as the second state. Further, when the round in the third big win game state corresponding to the 4 round big win is executed, after the big win game state is finished, it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state, and the big win game state. After the end of , it is possible to execute the during-big-hit performance by the common during-big-hit performance pattern APB33 in the case of being controlled to the low probability-high base state as the second state. In this way, by executing the performance during the big win according to the common performance pattern during the big win, it is made difficult to recognize whether the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state occurs when the performance during the big win is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

In the big win performance control example AKC13, the big win end performance pattern is set to a common pattern APC33 corresponding to the big win types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APC34 corresponding to the big win types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, when the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win ends, the case where it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state after the big win game state ends, and after the big win game state ends. It is possible to execute the jackpot end effect by the common jackpot end effect pattern APC34 in the case of being controlled to the low probability/high base state as the second state. In addition, when the third big win game state corresponding to the 4-round big win is finished, the control is performed to the high probability high base state as the first state after the big win game state is finished, and after the big win game state is finished. In the case of being controlled to the low-probability-high base state as the second state, it is possible to execute the big-hit end performance by the common big-hit end performance pattern APC33. Therefore, when the second big win game state corresponding to the 7-round big win ends, the case where it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state after the big win game state ends, and after the big win game state ends. It is possible to execute the jackpot end effect by the common jackpot end effect pattern APC34 in the case of being controlled to the low probability/high base state as the second state. In addition, when the third big win game state corresponding to the 4-round big win is finished, the control is performed to the high probability high base state as the first state after the big win game state is finished, and after the big win game state is finished. In the case of being controlled to the low-probability-high base state as the second state, it is possible to execute the big-hit end performance by the common big-hit end performance pattern APB33. In this way, by executing the big win end performance by the common big win end performance pattern, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state occurs when the big win end performance is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-31 shows a variable display control example AKC21 based on the special figure display result "big hit" when the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8, when the effect state selection designation value is 07 [H], the variation pattern type selection table corresponds to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12. A table TB32 is designated corresponding to the types NA10 and KA13, a table TB33 is designated corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and a table TB34 is designated corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. Also, in the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. , a table TB36 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, a table TB37 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and a table TB38 corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 are designated.

In the table TB31 shown in FIG. 9-11(E) and the table TB35 shown in FIG. 9-11(I), only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. In the table TB32 shown in FIG. 9-11(F) and the table TB36 shown in FIG. 9-11(J), only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 9-11 (G) and table TB37 shown in FIG. 9-11 (K) can select only the variation pattern type CB3-4. Table TB34 shown in FIG. 9-11 (H) and table TB38 shown in FIG. 9-11 (L) can select only the variation pattern type CB3-5. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 9-15(B), it is possible to determine either variation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15 (C) and the variation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 can be determined to be either In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 9-15 (E), any of the variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 can be determined.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot category KA15, and the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening is set to "07". This is the case of types NA11 and KA14, and the maximum value of the number of opening times of the big prize opening is set to "04" in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and the maximum number of times of opening the big prize opening is set to "02". This is the case of jackpot types NA09 and KA12. Of these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the jackpot types NA10, NA11, KA13, KA14 has more rounds than the first jackpot game state. corresponds to a second big winning game state with a small amount, and the big winning game state in the case of the big winning types NA09 and KA12 can correspond to a third big winning game state having a smaller number of rounds than the second big winning game state. The jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 are set to "Yes" where high base control is performed and "2" where the special game using the second special symbol is executed. Correspondingly determinable. In this way, it is possible to control based on the fact that the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special symbol has become a "jackpot" during the high base such as the time saving state in which the high base control is performed. The jackpot game states are the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 with a 10-round jackpot, and the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 with a 7-round jackpot with fewer rounds than the 10-round jackpot, or a jackpot with a 4-round jackpot. A second big win game state corresponding to types NA10 and KA13 and a third big win game state corresponding to big win types NA09 and KA12 in which the number of rounds is less than the big win of 7 rounds and big win of 4 rounds is included. .

Variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round big win or a 4-round big win as the second big win gaming state are variations that can be determined corresponding to the big win types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. These are patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. Then, if it is one of the jackpot types NA10 and NA11, it can be controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of the time saving counter initial value "10000" after the end of the second jackpot game state. On the other hand, the variation pattern PB3-1 that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the second round big win as the third big win gaming state is the variation pattern PB3-1 that can be determined corresponding to the big win types NA09 and KA12. , PB3-2. And if it is jackpot type NA09, after the end of the third jackpot game state, the time saving counter initial value can be controlled to the low certainty high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". The variation pattern PB3-1 included in the variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to such a jackpot type NA09 has a special figure variation time of 2500 milliseconds, and a variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11. The variable display period is shorter than the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in . In other words, the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in the determinable variation patterns corresponding to the big hit types NA10 and NA11 are the variation patterns PB3- included in the determinable variation patterns corresponding to the big hit type NA09. Compared to 1, the variable display time is longer. Thus, in the case of a variation pattern with a long variable display period, a sense of anticipation for being controlled to a second big win game state in which the number of rounds is greater than that of the third big win game state is heightened, and interest in the game related to the variable display is improved. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern PB3-2 included in the variation patterns determinable corresponding to the jackpot type NA09 is also included in the variation patterns determinable corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11. In the case of the jackpot type NA09, it is possible to control to the low probability high base state as the second state after the two round jackpot as the third jackpot game state is completed. In the case of the jackpot types NA10 and NA11, after the 4th round jackpot or the 7th round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is completed, the control can be performed to the low probability high base state as the second state. In this way, after the 4-round big win or 7-round big win, which is the second big win game state, is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state, and the end of the 2-round big win, which is the third big win game state. It is possible to determine a common variation pattern such as variation pattern PB3-2 in the case where it is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state later. Thus, in the case of a variation pattern of a specific variable display period, it is made difficult to recognize whether the second big winning game state or the third big winning game state is to be achieved, thereby improving the game amusement related to the variable display. can be done.

Corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state based on the second special figure jackpot in the high base, the specified value for the special period performance is set to ``10000'' for the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and the initial value of the time-saving counter is set to ``10000'' and there is no V prize. Then, the special period production specified value is set to 0E [H], and in the case of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the time reduction counter initial value is set to "70" and if there is a V prize, the special period production specified value is 07 [H ] is set. A high probability high base state with a time saving counter initial value of "70" corresponds to the first state, and a low probability high base state with a time saving counter initial value of "10000" corresponds to the second state. The data indicating the specified value for the special period effect is stored and stored in the special period effect buffer. In the setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-24, when there is no V prize in the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the command data indicating the command 9505 [H] as the background designation after the jackpot is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like. It is stored and ready for transmission. In the setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-25, when there is a V prize in the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the command data indicating the command 9506 [H] as the background designation after the jackpot is stored in the background designation command buffer. It is stored and ready for transmission. As a background designation command, when command 9505 [H] is sent and when command 9506 [H] is sent, it is in a high base such as a time saving state or a variable probability state in which high base control is performed , the background display may be performed using a common effect image.

As described above, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to set the data indicating the special period effect specified value as the count information, and when it is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state, the special period effect 07 [H] is set as the designated value, and 0E [H] is set as the special period effect designated value when controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state. In addition, it is possible to display the background using a common effect image based on the background designation command during the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. . In this way, by making it difficult to recognize whether it is in the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state based on the display of the effect image that is the common background image, the game interest related to the variable display is improved. can be made

Corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state based on the second special figure jackpot in the high base, the production state selection designated value is a common value for the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. 06[H]. After that, the effect state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H] during the low probability high base state based on the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and the effect state selection designation is performed during the high probability high base state based on the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The value is updated to 07[H]. When the effect state selection designation value is 06 [H], the reference table TS02 is designated in the reference table AKA01 at the time of loss shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) corresponding to the special figure display result "loss" be done. When the production state selection designation value is 07 [H], the special figure display result corresponds to "losing", and the reference table TS03 is designated in the losing time reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). be done. When the production state selection specified value is 08 [H], the reference table TS04 is specified in the lost time reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) corresponding to the special figure display result "loss" be done. The reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) selects one of the tables TB22 and TB23 according to the second reserved storage number when the starting entry winning designation value is "2". Can be specified as a table. The reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6 (E) selects one of the tables TB24 and TB25 according to the second reserved storage number when the starting entry winning designation value is "2". Can be specified in the table. Table TB22 shown in FIG. 9-10(I) and Table TB23 shown in FIG. 9-10(J), Table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10(K) and FIG. 10(L), the variation pattern types CB1-2 to CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be determined. In particular, the variation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be determined when any one of the tables TB22 to TB25 is designated.

As a result, when the number of times of variable display is less than "70" as the first number in the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, For example, a variation pattern can be determined using table data of a variation pattern determination table, which is common determination data corresponding to variation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1. In this way, since the variation pattern is determined using the common determination data, it is difficult to recognize whether it is in the high probability base state or the low probability height base state by increasing the commonality of the variable display By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the average variation time corresponding to each jackpot type can be obtained from the special figure variation time and determination ratio of the determinable pattern corresponding to each jackpot type. More specifically, by adding the value obtained by multiplying the special figure fluctuation time and the decision ratio for each determinable pattern for a plurality of determinable patterns corresponding to the jackpot type, the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type Obtainable. For example, it becomes 3900 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12, 16190 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, 16740 milliseconds corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. 20960 milliseconds. Variation patterns determinable corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the 10 round big win as the first big win gaming state are variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined corresponding to the big win type KA15. . Variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round big win or a 4-round big win as the second big win gaming state are variations that can be determined corresponding to the big win types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. These are patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. Variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the second round big win as the third big win gaming state are variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 that can be determined corresponding to the big win types NA09 and KA12. is. In this way, 20960 milliseconds, which is the average variation time in a plurality of variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot gaming state, is the second jackpot gaming state. The variable display period is longer than 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds, which are the average fluctuation times in multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the 7-round jackpot and 4-round jackpot. is set to In addition, the average variation time in a plurality of variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to the 7-round big win or 4-round big win as the second big win gaming state is 2 rounds as the third big win gaming state. The variable display period is set to be longer than 3900 milliseconds, which is the average variation time in a plurality of variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control of the big win. Thus, in the case of a variation pattern with a long variable display period, the expectation that the number of rounds is controlled to the second big win game state larger than that of the third big win game state is heightened, and the number of rounds is the second big win. The anticipation of being controlled to the first jackpot game state, which is larger than the game state, can be heightened, and the amusement of the game related to the variable display can be improved.

FIG. 9-32 shows a variable display control example AKC22 relating to the variable display that triggers control to the jackpot game state when the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In the variable display control example AKC22, the average fluctuation time for the whole fluctuation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the jackpot game state is shown. The average variation time for all of these variation patterns can be obtained from the average variation time corresponding to each jackpot type obtained in the variable display control example AKC21 and the high-base medium decision rate for each jackpot type. More specifically, by adding the value obtained by multiplying the average variation time for each jackpot type by the determination ratio for all jackpot types, the average variation time for the whole can be obtained. As a result, in the variable display control example AKC22, the overall average fluctuation time is 12650 milliseconds. In this case, 20960 milliseconds, which is the average variation time in a plurality of variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the 10th round jackpot as the first jackpot gaming state, is the average variation time for the whole. The variable display period is set to be longer than 12650 milliseconds. In addition, 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds, which are the average fluctuation times in a plurality of fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the 7th round jackpot or the 4th round jackpot as the second jackpot gaming state, The variable display period is set to be longer than the overall average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds. On the other hand, 3900 milliseconds, which is the average variation time in a plurality of variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the 2nd round jackpot as the third jackpot gaming state, is the average variation time for the whole. The variable display period is set to be shorter than 12650 milliseconds. Thus, in the case of a variation pattern with a long variable display period, the expectation that the number of rounds is controlled to the second big win game state larger than that of the third big win game state is heightened, and the number of rounds is the second big win. The anticipation of being controlled to the first jackpot game state, which is larger than the game state, can be heightened, and the amusement of the game related to the variable display can be improved.

FIG. 9-33(A) shows a variable display control example AKC31 corresponding to the effect state selection designated values 07[H], 08[H], 0C[H], and 0D[H]. When the production state selection designation value is 07 [H], the game state is the high-probability-high base state, and the special figure display result, which is the result of the variable display of the special symbols, is the variation pattern type CB2 corresponding to "losing". -1 can be selected. In addition, when the production state selection specified value is 08 [H], the game state is the low probability high base state, and the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to "losing". Type CB2-1 can be selected. The variation pattern type CB2-1 includes variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 as determinable variation patterns.

In the configuration example of the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation pattern PB2-2 executes the reach effect of the super reach SPE which is the second variable display effect during the variable display, and the special figure variation time is 16500. in milliseconds. On the other hand, the variation pattern PB2-3 executes the reach effect of the super reach SPF, which is the first variable display effect during the variable display, and the special figure variation time is 35500 milliseconds. In addition, in the configuration example of the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-5, the reach effect of the super reach SPE, which is the second variable display effect, is executed during the variable display of the variation pattern PB3-3, and the first variable display effect is performed. The reach effect of the super reach SPF is executed during the variable display of the variation pattern PB3-4. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-14 (J) or the fluctuation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 9-14 (K), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 It is set so that the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB2-3 is lower than that. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern CB4-4 shown in FIG. 9-16 (D) or the variation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 9-16 (E), from the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB3-3 are also set so that the determination ratio of the variation pattern PB3-4 is high. With such setting, the ratio of the ready-to-win performance of the super reach SPF, which is the first variable display effect, is controlled to the big hit game state is high, and the ready-to-win effect of the super reach SPE, which is the second variable display effect, is controlled to the big win game state. The ratio to be done is lower than the reach effect of super reach SPF.

In the variable display control example AKC31, when the effect state selection designation value is 0C [H], the game state is the high probability high base state, and the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "losing". Correspondingly, the variation pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 corresponding to the special figure display result "big hit" can be selected. In addition, when the production state selection specified value is 0D [H], the game state is the low probability high base state, and the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to "losing". The type CB1-9 can be selected, and the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 corresponding to the special figure display result "big hit" can be selected, respectively. Then, in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-8, it is possible to determine the variation pattern PB1-8, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-9, it is possible to determine the variation pattern PB1-9, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-1 In the case of the variation pattern type CB4-2, it is possible to determine the variation pattern PB3-9.

The special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern is 16500 milliseconds, and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB2-3 corresponding to the first special pattern is 35500 milliseconds. The display period is set to be short. In addition, in response to the fact that the number of variable display executions during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is "70" as the first number, the special figure display result is "loss" In this case, variation patterns PB1-8 can be determined, and variation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 can be determined when the special figure display result is "jackpot". Then, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds. Therefore, the variable display period is set to be shorter than 16500 milliseconds which is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern. As a result, it is possible to appropriately perform the variable display according to the variation pattern in which the result display as the value notification can be performed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

In response to the fact that the number of variable display executions during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is "70" as the first number, when the special figure display result is "jackpot" The determinable variation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 are the first pattern, and the determinable variation pattern PB1-8 corresponding to the special figure display result "losing" is the second pattern. Then, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds. is. All of these variation patterns have a variable display period shorter than 16500 milliseconds, which is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB2-2 that executes the reach effect of the super reach SPE, which is the second variable display effect. set. As a result, the variable display according to the variable pattern PB1-8 in which the result display as the value notification is executed can be appropriately executed, and the interest in the game related to the variable display can be improved.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the variation pattern PB3-2 can be determined in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-1. The variation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected when the table TB40 shown in FIG. 9-12(A) is specified. The table TB40, according to the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. can be specified corresponding to However, when the effect state selection designated value is 0C[H], 0D[H], the big hit types NA08 and KA11 are not determined. On the other hand, the variation pattern PB3-9 can be determined in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-2. The variation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected when the table TB41 shown in FIG. 9-12(B) is specified. The table TB41 can be designated corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 when the effect state selection designation values are 0C[H] and 0D[H] by the jackpot time reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-9 is determined, the 10-round big hit corresponding to the big win type KA15 can be controlled, and when the variation pattern PB3-2 is determined, the big win types NA09 to NA11 and the big win types KA12 to KA14. 2-round big win, 4-round big win, and 7-round big win corresponding to .

In response to the fact that the number of variable display executions during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is "70" as the first number, when the special figure display result is "jackpot" Of the determinable fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is the third pattern, and the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is the fourth pattern. These third and fourth patterns are included in the first pattern. Also, the special figure display result can be determined corresponding to the "loss" variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9 is the second pattern. Then, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds. , and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-9 is 29900 milliseconds. Therefore, the variation pattern PB3-2 as the third pattern and the variation pattern PB3-9 as the fourth pattern have a shorter variable display period than the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 as the second pattern. is set to As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of surprise when the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display in which the result display as the value notification is executed, and to improve the game amusement related to the variable display.

In response to the fact that the number of variable display executions during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is "70" as the first number, when the special figure display result is "jackpot" The determinable variation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 are special variable display patterns. In addition, in response to the fact that the number of variable display executions during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is less than "70" as the first number, the special figure display result is "big hit" The jackpot gaming states that can be controlled in this case are the first jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15, which is a 10-round jackpot, and the jackpot types NA11, KA14, or A second jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13 that result in a 4-round jackpot or jackpot types NA09 and KA12 that result in a 2-round jackpot is included. Variation patterns determinable corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the 10 round big win as the first big win gaming state are variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined corresponding to the big win type KA15. . These variable patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 are included in a plurality of specific variable display patterns.

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, the average variable time in a plurality of variable patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the 10 round jackpot as the first jackpot gaming state is 20960. in milliseconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, and the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, both of which have a shorter variable display period than 20960 milliseconds. is set to In this way, the variable display periods of the variable patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9, which are the special variable display patterns, are shorter than the average variable time of the plurality of variable display patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11, which are the specific variable display patterns. set. As a result, the variable display in which the result display serving as the value notification is executed can be appropriately executed, and the amusement of the game related to the variable display can be improved.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the number of times of execution of the variable display during the special state such as during the high probability high base state or during the low probability low base is "70" as the first number, corresponding to the special figure display result is "losing", the variation pattern types CB1-8 and CB1-9 can be selected, and when the special figure display result is "big hit", the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB1-8, only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-9, only the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-1 can be determined only for the variation pattern PB3-2, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-2, it can be determined only for the variation pattern PB3-9. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 correspond to specific determination data. Thus, when the result display as the value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display during the special state, the total number of variation patterns that can be determined using the specific determination data is "4". be. On the other hand, in response to the fact that the number of executions of variable display during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is less than "70" as the first number, the special figure display result is " In the case of "losing", the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected.

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, the number of executions of variable display during special states such as high probability high base state and low probability low base is less than "70" as the first number Correspondingly, it is possible to select the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5 when the special figure display result is "big hit". In the case of variation pattern type CB2-1, it is possible to determine either variation pattern PB2-2 or PB2-3. In the case of the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5, any one of the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 can be determined as a whole. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 correspond to normal determination data. Thus, the total number of variation patterns that can be determined using the normal determination data is "13", corresponding to the variable displays before the 70th time during the special state. Therefore, the total number of variation patterns that can be determined when the result display as the value notification is executed is smaller than the total number of variation patterns that can be determined during the previous special state. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data for executing the variable display in which the result display, which is the value notification, is executed, and at the same time improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

The high-accuracy-high base state that can be controlled until the variable display of 70 times corresponding to "70" as the first number of times of the time-saving counter initial value after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 is executed. Corresponding to the first state, after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the variable display of 10000 times corresponding to "10000" as the second count in which the initial value of the time saving counter is larger than the first count is displayed. A low probability high base state controllable until executed corresponds to the second state. In the high probability/high base state corresponding to the first state, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than in the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to perform variable display than in the normal state. In the low-probability-high base state corresponding to the second state, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the same as in the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to perform variable display than in the normal state. During the low probability high base state that is in the second state, until the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9931", the production state selection specified value corresponds to 08 [H], and the special figure display result is "loss" , the reference table TS04 is designated by the reference table AKA01 at loss shown in FIG. 9-6(A). The table data and the like forming the reference table TS04 correspond to the first determination data. In addition, when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9930", the effect state selection specified value corresponds to 0E [H], and when the special figure display result is "losing", the reference table TS02 by the reference table AKA01 at the time of losing is specified. The table data and the like forming the reference table TS02 correspond to the second determination data.

The reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6 (E) corresponds to the start entry winning prize designation value, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories, one of tables TB10, TB24, TB25, It can be specified as a fluctuation pattern type determination table. The reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C) corresponds to the starting point winning designation value, the number of first reserved memories, and the number of second reserved memories, one of tables TB10, TB20, TB21, It can be specified as a fluctuation pattern type determination table. The table TB20 shown in FIG. 9-10 (G) can select only the variation pattern type CB1-2, and the table TB21 shown in FIG. 9-10 (H) selects only the variation pattern type CB1-3 It is possible. On the other hand, the table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10 (K) can select the variation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 in addition to the variation pattern type CB1-2, and FIG. 9-10 ( In the table TB25 shown in L), fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be selected in addition to the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-2 shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), only the variation pattern PB1-2 can be determined, and the variation pattern type CB1 shown in FIG. 9-14 (C) In the case of -3, only the variation pattern PB1-3 can be determined. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-4 shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), the variation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5 can be determined, and the variation shown in FIG. 9-14 (J) In the case of the pattern type CB2-1, any one of the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 can be determined.

In the configuration example of the losing variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, the variation pattern PB1-2 has a special figure variation time of 3500 milliseconds, and the variation pattern PB1-3 has a special figure variation time of 500 milliseconds, The variation pattern PB1-4 has a special figure variation time of 500 milliseconds, and the variation pattern PB1-5 has a special figure variation time of 2000 milliseconds. In addition, the variation pattern PB2-1 has a special figure variation time of 3500 ms, the variation pattern PB2-2 has a special figure variation time of 16500 ms, and the variation pattern PB2-3 has a special figure variation time of 35500 ms. is. Thus, when the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, while when the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. Do not select pattern type CB2-1. Therefore, the variation pattern determinable using the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data has a higher average variable display period than the variation pattern determinable using the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data. is set to be short. As a result, the variable display in the low probability base corresponding to the second state can be executed quickly by shortening the average variable display period after exceeding the first number of "70". , the variable display can be executed appropriately, and the game interest related to the variable display can be improved.

When using the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data, the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 that can be determined in the case of the variation pattern type CB2-1 are , is a variation pattern that can execute a ready-to-win effect after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. In particular, the variation pattern PB2-2 can execute the ready-to-reach effect of super reach SPE, and the variation pattern PB2-3 can execute the ready-to-reach effect of super reach SPF. The reach effects of super reach SPE and SPF correspond to the specific effects, and the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 correspond to the effect variable display patterns. When the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 is not selected. -2, not including PB2-3. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the variable display during the low probability height base corresponding to the second state, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-33(B) shows a variable display control example AKC32 based on another viewpoint corresponding to the effect state selection designated values 07 [H], 08 [H], 0C [H], and 0D [H]. Similar to the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. In the case of KA12, the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is set to "02", and only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-2, it is possible to determine either the variation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. The 2-round big hit with the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening being “02” corresponds to the first type advantageous state, and the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 correspond to the first type variable display pattern. In addition, corresponding to the effect state selection specified value 07 [H], 08 [H], if the special figure display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot types NA10, KA13, the maximum number of openings of the big prize opening is "04 ”, and only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-3, any of the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 can be determined. The 4-round big hit with the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening of "04" corresponds to the second type advantageous state, and the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 correspond to the second type variable display pattern.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 9-33 (A), if the effect state selection specified value is 0C [H] and the special figure display result is "losing", only the variation pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and if the effect state selection specified value is 0D [H] and the special figure display result is "loss", only the variation pattern type CB1-9 can be selected. Further, if the effect state selection specified value is 0C[H], 0D[H] and the special figure display result is "big hit", the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In this way, when the result display as the value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display in the special state, the selection result of the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 A corresponding variation pattern can be determined. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 correspond to specific determination data.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 9-33 (A), if the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H], 08 [H] and the special figure display result is "losing", the variation pattern Only type CB2-1 can be selected. Also, in the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, if the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H], 08 [H] and the special figure display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type It is possible to select the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponding to . In this way, it is possible to determine the variation pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5, corresponding to the variable display before the 70th time during the special state. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 correspond to the normal determination data, and the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 correspond to the notification variable display pattern. .

The variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 corresponding to the first type variable display pattern and the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 corresponding to the second type variable display pattern all correspond to the type common variable display pattern. It contains a variation pattern PB3-2 that The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds. In addition, among the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds, and the special figure variation time of the variation pattern PB1-9 is 29900. in milliseconds. Therefore, the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variation pattern is set to have a shorter variable display period than the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern. By using the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to such a type common variation pattern, the increase in the variation pattern corresponding to the "jackpot" as the special figure display result is suppressed, so the increase in the data capacity can be prevented. In addition, since the variable display period is shortened in the case of the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variation pattern, the unexpectedness when the special figure display result becomes "jackpot" in the variable display is enhanced, and the game related to the variable display is improved. Interest can be improved.

In step AKS502 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 9-26, the number of executions of the variable display corresponding to the probability variation state and the time saving state reaches 70 times, and when the variation pattern PB3-2, the result display It may be determined that it is a variation pattern for use. In this case, result display control setting is performed in step AKS503. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the processing during effect symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. results can be displayed. The variation pattern PB3-2 can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12 and the jackpot types NA10 and KA13 even when the performance state selection designated value is 0C[H] or 0D[H]. . Such variation patterns correspond to common variable display patterns. Then, in the case of the jackpot type NA09, after the two-round jackpot as the third jackpot gaming state is completed, it is possible to control to the low probability high base state as the second state. In the case of the jackpot type NA10, after the 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is completed, it is possible to control to the low probability high base state as the second state. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-2 is determined corresponding to the number of times the variable display is executed in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state is "70" as the first number, the variable To provide a case where a result display as a value notification is executed during display, and a case is controlled to a low probability high base state corresponding to a second state after the big win game state is a 2nd round big win or a 4th round big win. can be done. Since it is possible to determine a common variation pattern such as the variation pattern PB3-2, in the case of the variable display in which the result display serving as the value notification is executed, the second big win game state or the third big win game state. By making it difficult to recognize , it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-34 shows a production state control example AKC41 based on another point of view corresponding to the second special figure jackpot in high base. When the high-base middle second special figure jackpot is one of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the jackpot type is included in the "probability variable", so V winning is likely to occur. On the other hand, when the big win game state ends without the occurrence of the V winning, the performance state is controlled to be different from that in the case of the occurrence of the V winning. In the setting example AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-25, if there is no V winning of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the specified value for the special period effect is set to 08 [H]. Thus, when there is no V winning in the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, in the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. '70' and 06 [H] as the effect state selection designation value are set. However, since the variable probability counter initial value is set to "0" corresponding to no V winning, it is controlled to the low probability high base state after the end of the big hit game state.

In the production state control example AKC41, when the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special production period specified value is set to 08 [H] corresponding to no V winning, and the initial value of the time reduction counter is set to "70", and the effect state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 corresponding to the end of the variable display, and the special period effect update setting is performed. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 08 [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 08 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "66". When the count value of the time saving counter becomes "1", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0C [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the production state selection specified value becomes 00 [H]. updated and initialized. On the other hand, if the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, if there is a V prize, the count value of the time saving counter is the same as the production state control example AKC02 shown in FIG. 9-29 It is possible to update to the effect state selection specified value corresponding to.

Thus, based on the fact that the high-base middle second special figure jackpot was one of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, when the special effect period specified value is set to 08 [H] corresponding to no V prize, When the count value of the time saving counter is from "66" to "1", the effect state selection designated value is 08 [H]. On the other hand, based on the fact that the high-base middle second special figure jackpot was the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, when the special effect period specified value is set to 07 [H] corresponding to the V prize, When the count value of the time saving counter is from "66" to "1", the effect state selection designated value is 07 [H]. On the other hand, when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "1", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0C[H] regardless of whether or not there is a V prize.

In the reference table AKA01 at the time of failure shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the reference table TS03 is specified when the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H], and the reference table TS03 is specified when the effect state selection specified value is 08 [H]. , the reference table TS04 is specified. Further, when the effect state selection designation value is 0C[H], the reference table TS08 is designated. The table data and the like forming the reference table TS03 correspond to the first special determination data, the table data and the like forming the reference table TS04 correspond to the second special determination data, and the table data and the like forming the reference table TS08 correspond to the second special determination data. It corresponds to the third special determination data. In this way, in the low probability high base state that can be controlled in the case of no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the number of execution times of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number. Then, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS04. On the other hand, in the high probability high base state which can be controlled when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the number of executions of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number. Corresponding to , it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the table data constituting the reference table TS03. And when the number of executions of variable display in the low probability high base state is "70" as the first number, and when the number of executions of variable display in the high probability high base state is "70" as the first number Correspondingly, it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the table data constituting the reference table TS08. Therefore, when the number of executions of variable display is "70" as the first number in the low probability high base state or high probability high base state that is in the special state, the reference corresponding to the third special determination data By determining the variation pattern using the table TS08, an increase in data volume can be prevented. Further, when the number of executions of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number of times, by determining the variation pattern using different determination data, the variable display is appropriately executed up to the first number of times. , it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-35 shows a production state control example AKC42 based on another point of view corresponding to the second special figure jackpot in high base. When the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, since the jackpot types are included in the "normal", the V prize is less likely to occur. On the other hand, when the V winning occurs and the jackpot game state ends, the performance state is controlled to be different from that in the case where the V winning does not occur. In the setting example AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-24, if there is a V prize of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the special period effect designation value is set to 0D [H]. Thus, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, in the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. "10000" and 06 [H] of the effect state selection designation value are set. Furthermore, since the variable probability counter initial value is set to "70" corresponding to the presence of the V prize, the game is controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot game state.

In the production state control example AKC42, when the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special production period specified value is set to 0D [H] corresponding to the V winning, and the initial value of the time reduction counter is set to "10000", and the effect state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 corresponding to the end of the variable display, and the special period effect update setting is performed. In the special period production setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special production period specified value is 0D [H], the production state selection specified value becomes 07 [H] when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9996". When the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9931", the production state selection specified value is updated to 0D [H], and when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9930", the production state selection specified value changes to 0E [H]. When it is updated and the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the effect state selection designated value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized. On the other hand, when the second special figure jackpot in the high base is the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, if there is no V prize, the count value of the time saving counter is the same as the production state control example AKC02 shown in FIG. 9-29. It is possible to update to the effect state selection specified value corresponding to.

Thus, based on the fact that the high-base medium second special figure jackpot was the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, when the special period production specified value is set to 0D [H] corresponding to the V prize, During the period from "9996" to "9931", the production state selection designated value is 07 [H]. On the other hand, based on the fact that the high-base medium second special figure jackpot was jackpot types NA09 to NA11, when the special performance period specified value is set to 0E [H] corresponding to no V prize, During the period from "9996" to "9931", the production state selection designated value is 08 [H]. On the other hand, when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9931", the production state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H] regardless of whether or not there is a V prize. Furthermore, when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "9930", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0E[H] regardless of whether or not there is a V prize.

In the reference table AKA01 at the time of failure shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the reference table TS03 is specified when the effect state selection specified value is 07 [H], and the reference table TS03 is specified when the effect state selection specified value is 08 [H]. , the reference table TS04 is specified. Further, when the effect state selection designation value is 0D[H], the reference table TS09 is designated, and when the effect state selection designation value is 0E[H], the reference table TS02 is designated. The table data and the like forming the reference table TS03 correspond to the first special determination data, the table data and the like forming the reference table TS04 correspond to the second special determination data, and the table data and the like forming the reference table TS09 correspond to the second special determination data. Corresponding to the fourth special determination data, the table data constituting the reference table TS02 and the like correspond to the common determination data. In this way, in the high-probability-high base state that can be controlled when there is a V prize in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, it corresponds to the fact that the number of executions of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number. Then, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data that constitutes the reference table TS03. On the other hand, in the low probability high base state that can be controlled when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the number of executions of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number. Corresponding to , it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the table data constituting the reference table TS04. And when the number of executions of variable display in the low probability high base state is "70" as the first number, and when the number of executions of variable display in the high probability high base state is "70" as the first number The variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS09. After that, if the number of executions of variable display in the low probability base state exceeds "70" as the first number, and the number of executions of variable display in the high probability base state exceeds "70" as the first number It is possible to determine the variation pattern using the table data constituting the reference table TS02 corresponding to the case of exceeding. Therefore, when the number of executions of variable display in the low probability high base state or high probability high base state during the special state is "70" as the first number or exceeds "70", the fourth By determining the variation pattern using the reference table TS09 corresponding to the special determination data and the reference table TS02 corresponding to the common determination data, an increase in data volume can be prevented. Further, when the number of executions of the variable display is less than "70" as the first number of times, by determining the variation pattern using different determination data, the variable display is appropriately executed up to the first number of times. , it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

FIG. 9-36 shows an effect execution example when the result display and the state notification effect are executed. In this production execution example, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the time reduction counter initial value is controlled to a high probability high base state of "70", and the time reduction counter initial value is "10000". and when controlled to a high base state. The high-probability-high base state here corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability-high base state corresponds to the second state.

Figure 9-36 (A) shows that during the high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state in which high-base control is performed, the number of times the variable display is executed is less than 70 times as the first number in the period A production execution example AK101 is shown. In the production execution example AK101, a common production image is used as a background image for the case of the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and the case of the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. The background is displayed on the screen of the display device 5 as a medium background with a high base.

FIG. 9-36(B) shows an effect execution example AK102 when the number of executions of variable display reaches 70 times as the first number during the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state. At this time, the variation pattern PB1-8 is determined if it is a high probability high base state corresponding to the first state, and the variation pattern PB1-9 is determined if it is a low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. In step AKS502 of the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 9-26, it is determined that both of the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 are variation patterns for result display, and result display control is performed in step AKS503. Settings are made. Based on this setting, in the effect execution example AK102, a result display as a value notification for notifying the result of the value obtained by the player, such as the total number of prize balls obtained by the player and the so-called number of consecutive games, is executed.

FIG. 9-36(C) shows an effect execution example AK103 after the end of the high probability/high base state corresponding to the first state. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the count value of the time saving counter matches the time saving counter judgment value "0", the command 9500 [H] is set to be transmittable as the background designation command. be done. The effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 performs the background display as the normal background in the normal state based on the reception of the background designation command. In addition, in the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 9-18, when it is determined that the count value of the probability variation counter is "0" at step AKS127, the probability variation state by clearing the probability variation flag at step AKS128, etc. The variable probability control in ends. Further, when it is determined in step AKS131 that the count value of the time saving counter is "0", the high base control in the time saving state is terminated by clearing the time saving flag in step AKS132.

FIGS. 9-36 (D) to (F) show production execution examples AK104 to AK106 when the low probability height base state corresponding to the second state continues. Of these, the effect execution example AK104 shown in FIG. 9-36 (D) and the effect execution example AK105 shown in FIG. included. At step AKS504 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 9-26, it is determined that the variation pattern PB1-9 is the state notification effect variation pattern, and the state notification effect control setting is performed at step AKS505. Based on this setting, in the effect execution example AK104, the button display AKE01 is performed by displaying the effect image showing the push button 31B as the specific image on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The effect image corresponding to the button display AKE01 may not be displayed while the result display of the effect execution example AK103 is performed in the case of the high accuracy high base state corresponding to the first state. On the other hand, the effect image corresponding to the button display AKE01 is displayed when the result display of the effect execution example AK103 is executed in the case of the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. good too. By executing appropriate notification by such button display AKE01, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

After that, it may be possible to execute different state notification effects depending on whether or not the player's action, such as a pressing operation on the push button 31B, is detected. Effect execution example AK105 displays, on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect image that notifies that the low-probability-high base state corresponding to the second state is detected when a pressing operation on the push button 31B is detected. Notification display is performed by doing. On the other hand, when the pressing operation on the push button 31B is not detected, the state notification effect may be ended with the end of the variable display without performing the notification display.

In the effect execution example AK106, in the case of the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, the number of executions of the variable display exceeds 70 times as the first number and becomes 71 times or later. In this case, the background is displayed as a high-base medium background similar to the effect execution example AK101. Such a background display makes it easy to recognize that the low-probability-high base state corresponding to the second state continues, and can improve the game interest related to the variable display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 23AK)
A game machine which performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and determines a special state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a variable display pattern. variable display pattern determination means; and notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification including value notification for informing the result of the value acquired by the player. a first state that is controllable until the number of variable displays is performed; and a second state that is controllable until the variable display is performed a second number of times, which is greater than the first number of times after the end of the advantageous state; The variable display pattern determining means can determine the first variable display pattern in response to the first variable display execution count during the first state, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the first variable display pattern corresponding to the first variable display execution count during the second state. A second variable display pattern can be determined corresponding to the first number of times, and the notification means executes value notification during variable display by the first variable display pattern, and during variable display by the second variable display pattern. The value notification and the notification of the second state are performed at the same time, and the variable display period of the second variable display pattern is longer than that of the first variable display pattern. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. The special state control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step AKS166, for example. The variable display pattern determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the variable pattern setting process of step AKS110. Value notification may be effect execution example AK102, for example. The notification means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS525 and AKS527. The first number may be, for example, "70". The first state may be, for example, a high probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The second number may be, for example, "10000". The second state may be, for example, a low probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The first variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB1-8. The second variable display pattern may be the variable pattern PB1-9, for example. The notification of the second state may be, for example, effect execution examples AK102, AK104, and AK105. The variable display period may be long, for example, in variable display control example AKC11.
According to such a configuration, the first variable display pattern and the second variable display pattern differ in the variable display period and the notification content, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

[1] Equipped with advantageous state control means capable of performing variable display of identification information and controlling to an advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, and when the variable display is controlled to the special state, the variable display is controlled. The display result may be controlled to the second state based on the result of being specified by the second identification information of the identification information, and the display result of the variable display is identified when not controlled to the special state. Based on the result of identification by the second identification information among the information, there is no case of being controlled to the second state, and it is variable between when it is controlled to the special state and when it is not controlled to the special state. There may be no case where the display result of the display is controlled to the second state based on the identification result of the first identification information among the identification information. Here, the advantageous state control means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes, for example, the big winning opening pre-opening process, the big winning opening opening process, the big winning opening post-opening process, and the big win ending process. When it is controlled to the second state, it is sufficient if, for example, the jackpot game state corresponding to one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 ends.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display by the control corresponding to whether or not the special state is controlled and the variable display resulting from the specified result.

[2] Variable means capable of changing between a first variable state in which a game medium can enter and a second variable state in which a game medium cannot enter, and variable display of identification information, and a display result of the variable display is a specified result. Advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state when , and variable control means capable of executing a predetermined number of unit games for changing the variable means to the first variable state in the advantageous state, and controlling to the special state. The advantageous state that can be controlled based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is specified by the second identification information among the identification information when the first advantageous state A second advantageous state in which the number of games played is small, and after the first advantageous state is ended, there is a case where control is performed to the first state, there is no case where the control is made to the second state, and the second advantageous state ends. Afterwards, there may be a case of being controlled to the first state and a case of being controlled to the second state. Here, the first variable state may be, for example, an open state. The second variable state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable means may be, for example, the special variable winning ball device 50 or the like. The advantageous state control means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes, for example, pre-opening of the big winning opening, processing during opening of the big winning opening, post-opening of the big winning opening, and big win ending process. The unit game may be, for example, a round in the jackpot game state. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and KA12 to KA14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in the case of the second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is small, and to improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[3] Advantageous states that can be controlled based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is specified by the second identification information among the identification information while being controlled to the special state are the first advantageous state and the first advantageous state. A second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is played less than that of the first advantageous state, and a third advantageous state in which the number of unit games is played less than that of the second advantageous state are included. There are cases in which control is performed in the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and after termination of the third advantageous state. It may be controlled and may be controllable to the second state at a higher rate after termination of the third advantageous state than after termination of the second advantageous state. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14. The third advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13. When it is controlled to the second state, for example, when the jackpot game state corresponding to one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 ends. It suffices if, for example, the case of the jackpot control example AKC12 can be controlled to the second state at a high rate.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in the third advantageous state in which the number of unit games is small, and to improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[4] The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the display is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and the second advantageous state in response to the variable display that triggers the control to the second advantageous state. The variable display pattern can be determined using the common first data in the case where the control is performed to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. The variable display pattern can be determined using common second data in the case of controlling to the first state after the termination of the three advantageous states and the case of controlling to the second state after the termination of the third advantageous state. There may be. Here, the common first data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table designated when variation pattern type CB3-4 is selected. Common second data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when variation pattern type CB3-3 is selected.
In such a configuration, by increasing the commonality of the variable display and making it difficult to recognize whether the state is the first state or the second state, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game related to the variable display.

[5] The variable display pattern that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to the second advantageous state includes the first specific pattern in the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state. , the variable display pattern determinable corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the third advantageous state includes a second specific pattern in the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state; One specific pattern may have a longer variable display period than the second specific pattern. Here, the first specific pattern may be any one of the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8, for example. The second specific pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-1. The variable display period may be long in the variable display control example AKC21, for example.
With such a configuration, when the variable display period is long, it is possible to increase the expectation of being controlled to the second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is more than the third advantageous state, thereby improving the game amusement related to the variable display. can.

[6] The variable display pattern determination means selects the second variable display pattern after the second advantageous state as a variable display pattern that can execute value notification in response to the first variable display execution count during the special state. It may be possible to determine a common variable display pattern in the case of being controlled to the state and the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. Here, the common variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state or the third advantageous state occurs when the variable display is performed the first number of times, the interest in the game related to the variable display is improved. can be done.

[7] A case where starting effect executing means capable of executing a starting effect corresponding to the start of the advantageous state is provided, and the starting effect executing means is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state; A common performance at the start can be executed in the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and the case of being controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and the third advantageous state. It may be possible to execute a common start-time effect in the case where control is performed to the second state after the end of . For example, it is sufficient if the big-hit start performance pattern in the big-hit performance control example AKC13 becomes common corresponding to the maximum number of times of opening the big winning opening.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the state will be the first state or the second state when the effect at the start is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[8] Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect corresponding to a unit game that can be executed a predetermined number of times in an advantageous state is provided, and the predetermined effect executing means is controlled to the first state after the second advantageous state ends. A common predetermined effect can be executed in the case of control to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and the case of being controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and the case of being controlled to the third state after the end of the third advantageous state. It may be possible to execute a common predetermined effect in the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the advantageous state. For example, it is sufficient if the effect pattern during the big win in the example AKC13 of effect control at the time of the big win becomes common corresponding to the maximum number of opening times of the big winning prize.
With such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the state will be the first state or the second state when the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[9] An end effect executing means capable of executing an end effect in response to the end of the advantageous state, wherein the end effect executing means is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state; A common end performance can be executed in the case of being controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and the case of being controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and the third advantageous state. It may be possible to execute a common end-time presentation in the case where control is performed to the second state after the end of . For example, it is sufficient if the big win end effect pattern in the big win effect control example AKC13 becomes common corresponding to the maximum number of times the big winning hole is opened.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the state will be the first state or the second state when the end effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game amusement related to the variable display.

[10] A counting means capable of setting counting information corresponding to the termination of the advantageous state, wherein the counting means sets counting information indicating a first specified value when controlled to the first state, and sets the counting information indicating the first specified value when the state is controlled to the second state. It may be possible to set the count information indicating the second specified value when the control is performed so that a common background image can be displayed during the first state and during the second state. Here, the counting means may be, for example, a special period effect specified value buffer or the like. The first designated value may be, for example, 07[H]. The second designated value may be, for example, 0E[H]. The common background image may be, for example, the effect image of the high base medium background in the effect execution example AK101.
With such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the player is in the first state or the second state based on the display of the background image, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[11] The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the number of variable display executions during the first state is less than the first number of times and the variable display execution number of times during the second state is less than the first number of times. , the variable display pattern may be determined using common determining data. For example, it may be table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when the variation pattern type CB2-1 is selected.
In such a configuration, by increasing the commonality of the variable display and making it difficult to recognize whether the player is in the first state or the second state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[12] The variable display pattern determining means is different depending on whether the number of variable display executions during the first state is the first number or the number of variable display executions during the second state is the first number. The determining data may be used to determine the variable display pattern. For example, it may be table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when variation pattern types CB1-8 are selected and when variation pattern types CB1-9 are selected.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the first variable display and improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[13] The variable display pattern determining means performs a first non-specified variable display for a first variable display period when the display result of the variable display performed the first number of times during the first state is not a specified result. A second variable display period that is twice or more as long as the first variable display period when the display result of the variable display in which the pattern is determinable and the number of executions during the second state is the first number is not the specified result. The notification means executes value notification during variable display by the first non-specific pattern, value notification during variable display by the second non-specific pattern and A notification that it is in the second state may be executed. Here, the first variable display period may be, for example, a case where the special figure variation time is 12500 milliseconds. The first non-specific pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB1-8. The second variable display period may be, for example, when the special figure fluctuation time is 29900 milliseconds. The second non-specific pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB1-9. The notification of the second state may be, for example, the effect execution example AK105.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the first variable display and improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[14] A specific display means capable of displaying a specific image is provided, and the specific display means displays the specific image while the value notification is executed during the variable display in which the number of executions in the first state is the first number of times. Alternatively, the specific image may be displayed when the value notification is executed during the variable display in which the number of executions in the second state is the first number. Here, the specific image may be, for example, an effect image of the button display AKE01. The specific display means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. Not displaying the specific image may be, for example, effect execution example AK103. Displaying the specific image may be, for example, the effect execution example AK104.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the variable display by executing appropriate notification.

[15] The notification means executes the value notification during the variable display that is executed the first number of times during the special state, and the variable display pattern determination means executes the variable display the number of times the variable display is executed during the special state is less than the first number of times. , a first special pattern capable of executing a first variable display effect with a high rate of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a second variable display effect having a lower rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first variable display effect. and any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a second special pattern capable of executing The means may be capable of determining a variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern when the number of variable display executions during the special state is a first number. Here, the first variable display effect may be, for example, a reach effect of super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB2-3. The second variable display effect may be, for example, a reach effect of super reach SPE. The second special pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB2-2. The variable display period of the first special pattern may be, for example, the case where the special figure fluctuation time is 35500 milliseconds. The variable display period of the second special pattern may be, for example, the case where the special figure fluctuation time is 16500 milliseconds. The variable display pattern with a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern is, for example, a variation pattern PB1-8 with a special figure variation time of 12500 milliseconds, a variation pattern PB3-2 with a special figure variation time of 4500 milliseconds, a special A variation pattern PB3-9 having a figure variation time of 11500 milliseconds may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the variable display in which the value notification is executed, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

[16] The variable display pattern determination means is capable of executing a first variable display effect with a high rate of being controlled to an advantageous state when the number of variable display executions during the special state is less than the first number of times. any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a pattern and a second special pattern capable of executing a second variable display effect whose rate of control to be in an advantageous state is lower than that of the first variable display effect, and A first pattern corresponding to a case where the display result of the variable display whose number of times of execution is the first number during the special state is the specified result, and the display result of the variable display whose number of times of execution is the first number of times during the special state are specified. and a second pattern corresponding to the case where the result is not the result, and the first pattern and the second pattern have a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern. good too. Here, the first variable display effect may be, for example, a reach effect of super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB2-3. The second special pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB2-2. The first pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, or the like. The second pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB1-8. The variable display period may be short in the variable display control example AKC31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the variable display in which the value notification is executed, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

[17] The advantageous state includes a first value advantageous state and a second value advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first value advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determining means determines the number of executions during the special state. The first pattern corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is the first number of times is the specific result, and the first pattern corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is the first number of executions during the special state is not the specific result. any of a plurality of variable display patterns including a second pattern, wherein the first pattern is a third pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the first value advantageous state; , a fourth pattern determinable corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the second value advantageous state, wherein the variable display period of the third pattern and the fourth pattern is shorter than that of the second pattern. may Here, the first value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is one of "02", "04", and "07". The second value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is "10". The first pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, or the like. The second pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, or the like. The third pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2. The fourth pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-9. The variable display period may be short if, for example, the effect state selection designated values 0C[H] and 0D[H] in the variable display control example AKC31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of surprise when the first variable display results in a specific result, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[18] The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is smaller than that of the first advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means executes variable display during the special state. When the number of times is less than the first number of times, one of a plurality of specific variable display patterns can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state, and the variable display during the special state can be determined. A special variable display pattern can be determined corresponding to the first execution count, and the special variable display pattern has a shorter variable display period than the average variable display period of the plurality of specific variable display patterns. good too. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is "10". The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is one of "02", "04", and "07". The specific variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11. The special variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, and the like. The variable display period is short, for example, in the case of the jackpot type KA15 in the variable display control example AKC21, and in the variable display control example AKC31, the variable display result is "jackpot" with the effect state selection specified values 0C [H] and 0D [H]. Any case is acceptable.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the first number of variable displays, thereby improving the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[19] The advantageous state includes a first-class advantageous state and a second-class advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determining means corresponds to the first number of variable display executions during the special state. A variable display pattern that can be notified by the notification means can be determined using the specific determination data, and when the number of times the variable display is performed during the special state is less than the first number, the normal determination data The normal determination data makes it possible to determine the first type variable display pattern in response to the variable display that triggers the control to the first type advantageous state, and the second type advantageous state. The second type variable display pattern can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to the state, and the data for specific determination is the case of the variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state and the second type variable display pattern. It is possible to determine a common type common variable display pattern in the case of variable display that triggers control to the type advantageous state, and to execute notification by the notification means in response to the variable display that does not trigger control to the advantageous state. and the common type variable display pattern may be included in the first type variable display pattern and the second type variable display pattern, and may have a shorter variable display period than the informing variable display pattern. Here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is "04". The specific determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when, for example, the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when, for example, the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9. The variable display period may be short if, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2 is compared with the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume, increase the degree of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result, and improve the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[20] The variable display pattern determination means uses the specific determination data to determine a variable display pattern that can be notified by the notification means in response to the first number of variable display executions during the special state. The variable display pattern can be determined using normal determination data and can be determined using specific determination data when the number of variable display executions during the special state is less than the first number of times. The total number of variable display patterns may be less than the total number of variable display patterns that can be determined using normal determination data. Here, the specific determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table specified when, for example, the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be table data of a variation pattern determination table that is designated when, for example, the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The fact that the total number is small is, for example, the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 in the variable display control example AKC21 and the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 in the variable display control example AKC31, which are compared to the total number "13". If the total number of PB1-8, PB1-9, PB3-2, and PB3-9 is "4", it will suffice.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity and improve the game interest related to the variable display.

[21] In the first state, the probability of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher than in the normal state, and the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state until the variable display is executed the first number of times. In the second state, the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same as in the normal state, and the variable display is executed a second number of times in such a manner that the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern using the first determination data until the number of times the variable display is performed in the second state reaches the first number. Yes, after the number of executions of variable display during the second state exceeds the first number, the variable display pattern can be determined using the second determination data, and the variable display pattern can be determined using the second determination data The display pattern may have a shorter average variable display period than the variable display pattern determinable using the first determination data. Here, the first determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04. The second determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS02. The fact that the average variable display period is short means that, for example, the variation pattern type CB2-1 includes the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3, whereas the variation pattern types CB1-2 and CB1-3 include the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2. It is acceptable if it does not include -3.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the variable display during the second state, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

[22] The variable display pattern that can be determined using the first determination data is a variable display that can notify whether or not to execute a specific effect and control to an advantageous state after the ready-to-win state is established in the variable display. A variable display pattern that includes a pattern and can be determined using the second determination data may not include a rendering variable display pattern. Here, the specific effect may be, for example, super reach SPE, reach effect of SPF, or the like. The effect variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the variable display during the second state, thereby improving the game interest related to the variable display.

[23] The advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state in which a specific condition can be established, and the special state control means, based on the establishment of the specific condition during the specific advantageous state, shifts to the first special state after the specific advantageous state ends. controllable, based on non-satisfaction of a specific condition during a specific advantageous state, can be controlled to a second special state after the specific advantageous state ends, and the first special state and the second special state are controlled a first number of times; It is a state in which variable display is likely to be performed until variable display is performed, and the variable display pattern determining means selects the first The variable display pattern can be determined using the special determination data, and the second special determination data is used to vary the variable display pattern in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is performed during the second special state is less than the first number of times. The display pattern can be determined, and corresponds to the case where the variable display is executed the first number of times during the first special state and the case where the variable display is executed the first number of times during the second special state. Therefore, the variable display pattern may be determined using the third special determination data. Here, the specific condition may be, for example, that the specific area passage flag is turned on. The specific advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The first special state may be, for example, a high-probability high base state with a time-saving counter initial value "70" corresponding to V winning. The second special state may be, for example, a low-probability-high base state with a time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V winning, "70". The first special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS03. The second special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04. The third special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS08.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and appropriately perform the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[24] A variable winning means having a specific area and capable of changing between a first change state in which game media can enter and a second change state in which game media cannot enter, wherein the specific area is set during a specific advantageous state. A specific condition is established by the passing of the game medium, and the first state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than in the normal state, and the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, The second state may be a state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is the same as in the normal state, and in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state. Here, the specific area may be, for example, the V winning area 51 or the like. The first change state may be, for example, an open state. The second changed state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable winning means may be, for example, the special variable winning ball device 50 or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and appropriately perform the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby improving the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[25] The advantageous state includes a special advantageous state in which a specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the special state control means, based on the establishment of the specific condition during the special advantageous state, shifts to a third special state after the special advantageous state ends. controllable, based on non-establishment of a specific condition during the special advantageous state, controllable to a fourth special state after the end of the special advantageous state, the third special state and the fourth special state being repeated a second number of times; It is a state in which variable display is likely to be performed until variable display is performed, and the variable display pattern determining means selects the first The variable display pattern can be determined using the special determination data, and the second special determination data can be used in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during the fourth special state is less than the first number of times. The display pattern can be determined, and corresponds to the case where the variable display is executed the first number of times during the third special state and the case where the variable display is executed the first number of times during the fourth special state. , the variable display pattern can be determined using the fourth special determination data, and when the number of times the variable display is executed during the third special state exceeds the first number of times, and when the variable display pattern is executed during the fourth special state It may be possible to determine the variable display pattern using common determination data when the number of times of execution exceeds the first number of times. Here, the special advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The third special state may be, for example, a high-probability high-base state such as a time-saving counter initial value "10000" corresponding to V winning. The fourth special state may be, for example, a low-probability-high base state with a time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V winning, "10000". The first special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS03. The second special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04. The fourth special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS09. The common determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS02.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume and appropriately execute variable display exceeding the first number of times, thereby improving the game interest related to variable display.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of symbols, scrolling display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 12). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 10, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 12). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 10, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 10), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 12).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery processing in step S904. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and step S906 are executed. The setting change process of S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) and other data are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, the process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 14 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. Figure 16 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 16 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 16 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the set value of the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 16(A).

As shown in FIG. 16 (B), for the case where the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1 and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 16 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as the reference value of the loss with time reduction (reference value with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 18 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 19, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state has been received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. The present characteristic portion 029SG includes the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG.

The game machine of form 1 of invention 029SG is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestive effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., A plurality of types of suggestive effects including reach effect A), second suggestive effect (eg reach effect B), third suggestive effect (eg reach effect F), and fourth suggestive effect (eg reach effect E) are executed. Possible suggestive production execution means (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes the production process during variable display shown in FIG. 19),
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A), the special development after it is notified that the control is not performed in the advantageous state as the effect result of the second suggestive effect. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as a second development pattern. (for example, the portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the production process during variable display shown in FIG. 19), which is the part where the reach production E development notification production is executed after the loss) is once notified;
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion performance with a higher degree of expectation than the first suggestion performance after execution of the special development performance (for example, , As shown in FIG. 20-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach η, the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect A, and the ready-to-reach effect F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect E is further executed),
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, as shown in FIGS. L7 is a portion longer than the execution period length L6b of the reach effect E development notification effect),
The special development effect is a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55) and an effect executed after the first effect. 20-10 and 20-55), and an effect executed after the second effect, wherein the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. a third effect (for example, the latter effects shown in FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55) in which the latter information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from execution of the special development performance to notification of control to the advantageous state is longer than the period from execution of the special development performance to notification of control to the advantageous state. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9, the period from the high expectation reach production development notification production start timing to the end timing of the reach production I (variable display result notification timing) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect F are the end timing of the reach effect E from the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E ( The portion set longer than the length of the period L11 until the notification timing of the variable display result),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the period until it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state is excessively prolonged, thereby reducing the interest in the game. The decrease can be suppressed, and when the special suggestive performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, the player is favorably focused on the special suggestive performance before being informed that the control is in an advantageous state. Since it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine according to Form 2 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1,
The effect period of the second suggested effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The portion set longer than the period length L1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the second suggestive effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestive effect, so that the game interest can be improved. Further, in the second suggestive effect, unlike the first suggestive effect, the development effect is not executed before the effect result is notified. It is possible to surely make the player pay attention to whether or not it is notified that the control is made to be in an advantageous state as the performance result of the second suggestive performance.

A gaming machine according to Mode 3 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 1 or Mode 2,
Development suggestive effect execution means capable of executing at least a development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestive effect, reach effect G development suggestive effect) (for example, effect control CPU 120 The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. After determining execution of the reach effect G development suggestive effect in the reach effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in -29, a portion for executing the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19),
The development-suggestion production executing means includes:
As the development suggestive effect, a special development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect can be executed during both the execution period of the first suggestive effect and the execution period of the second suggestive effect ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 and 20-8, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, when the reach effect A is being executed and The part where the meter effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's expectation for the execution of the special development performance. can.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3,
When the special suggesting effect is executed without executing the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, the developing effect executing means executes the special developing effect for the first time before the special suggesting effect is executed. It can be executed as 3 development patterns (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 and 20-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, reach production A and reach production B are executed without going through At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M suddenly increases to the 5th stage and the high expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the first suggestive performance and the second suggestive performance are not executed, the special development performance is executed to make the player pay attention to whether or not the highly anticipated special suggestive performance is executed. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Form 5 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
During the period from execution of the special development performance to execution of the special suggestive performance and notification of control to the advantageous state, the third suggestion performance is executed after the special development performance is executed. is longer than the period until it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. The length L13 of the period until the end timing of I (notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect F. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by lengthening the period until the notification when the highly anticipated special development effect is executed.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 5,
A development suggestive effect execution means capable of executing at least a development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect (for example, a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestive effect, a reach effect G development suggestive effect) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. After determining execution of the reach effect G development suggestive effect in the reach effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in -29, a part for executing the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG.
The development-suggestion effect executing means includes a special development-suggestion effect (e.g., meter effect) that suggests execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode in stages, and It is possible to execute a special development suggestive effect (for example, a reach effect E development suggestive effect) that suggests the execution of a special development effect,
The rate at which the production mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestive production is higher than the rate at which the production mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestive production (for example, shown in FIGS. 20-24 and 20-54). Thus, in the meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes by 5 stages (6 stages if the meter effect non-execution state is included), whereas in the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion image is displayed. changes in two stages),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestive effect in which the special development suggestive effect is executed and the second suggestive effect in which the special development suggestive effect is executed, and in the special development suggestive effect, the special development is performed. Since it is easier to change to the specific number of steps than the suggestive effect, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the game will change to the specific number of steps, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 7 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 6,
The period during which the special development suggesting effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggesting effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. In the variable display with the variation pattern, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the special development effect is performed, the third suggestion effect, which is more expected than the first suggestion effect, is performed, and after the execution of the special development effect is suggested, the fourth suggestion effect is performed. Since it can be suggested over a long period of time rather than being executed, the production interest of the special development suggestion production can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 8 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 or Embodiment 7,
When the second suggestive effect is executed, the development suggestive effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) until the result of the second suggestive effect is notified. The E development suggestive effect is a portion that can be executed after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution of the special development suggestive performance during the execution of the second suggestive performance allows the player to recognize that the player is informed that the second suggestive performance is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the second suggestive performance. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 9 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 8,
An advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a chance-up effect) that suggests that the effect result of the suggesting effect during execution of the suggesting effect will result in an advantageous result for the player, and constitutes the advantageous result suggesting effect. Advantageous result suggesting effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. part that executes the middle production process),
The number of executions of the composition effect when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times of execution of the composition effect when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 20-34) During execution of the ready-to-win effect F, a total of three effects, i.e., display of the ready-to-win title in red, movement of the movable body 32, and display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, are performed as effects constituting the chance-up effect. While it is executable (chance-up effects can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U), during execution of ready-to-win effect A, the ready-to-win title is displayed in red as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. A portion where a total of two effects of the action of the movable body 32 can be executed (chance-up effects can be executed with pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the composition effect when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of executions of the composition effect when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 20-34). During execution of ready-to-win effect E, a total of two effects, red display of the ready-to-win title and movement of the movable body 32, can be executed as effects constituting the chance-up effect (chance-up effects are shown in pattern S and pattern Q). On the other hand, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B, as the effect constituting the chance-up effect, a total of three effects of the red display of the ready-to-win title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 are displayed. Effect can be executed (chance up effect can be executed with pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special development performance is executed before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is notified and the third suggestive performance is further executed, the first suggestive performance is executed. When the third suggestive effect is being executed, the number of executions of the composition effect is increased, so that the player can be appropriately focused on the effect result of the third suggestive effect. In the case where the special development performance is executed after being notified that the control is not in an advantageous state as the performance result of the second suggestion performance, and the fourth suggestion performance is further executed, the composition performance when the fourth suggestion performance is executed. is less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestive effect is being executed. It can improve amusement interest.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 10 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 9,
The advantageous result suggesting effect executing means can execute the advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestive effect of the common mode is executed, the expectation level differs depending on the type of the suggestive effect in which the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 029SG-12, the reach title A portion where the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display and the action of the movable body 32 is executed in one of the ready-to-win effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while suppressing an increase in the number of modes of advantageous result suggesting effects, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the suggesting effects the common modes of advantageous result suggesting effects are to be executed. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 11 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 9 or Mode 10,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of displaying an expectation degree corresponding image corresponding to the degree of expectation of the suggestive effect when executing the suggestive effect, and displaying the expected degree corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed. (For example, as shown in modification 029SG-5, when changing the characters of the reach title image to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, it is displayed together with the reach title image. (Increase the number of stars displayed as the expectation image) to change the display mode of the expectation image showing the expectation of the jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the expectation-corresponding image changes with the execution of the advantageous result suggesting effect, it is possible to increase the attention to the expectation-corresponding image. can be recognized.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 12 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiments 1 to 11,
A specific image suggestive effect (e.g., a deformation Example 029SG-1 (active display effect shown in example 029SG-1) can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-57 as modified example 029SG-1, active Display area 029SG005F displays the active display in any of a plurality of display modes, and a portion that changes the degree of expectation for a big hit depending on which display mode the active display is displayed),
The specific image suggestion effect executing means can execute a common specific image suggestion effect as the specific image suggestion effect in any of the different types of suggestion effects (for example, the active display is a white circle, parts that can be displayed in blue circles and red circles),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is executed after the special development effect is executed. Lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-58 as modification 029SG-1, variable display In variable display of variation pattern of super ready-to-win η in which high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed before the result is announced and further ready-to-win performance F is executed, active display is displayed during execution of ready-to-win performance A. The rate P2 at which the mode changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F. lower than P3),
The rate at which the common specific image suggesting effect is executed during the execution of the third suggesting effect executed after the special developing effect is executed in the first developing pattern is the special developing effect in the second developing pattern. is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestive effect that is executed after the execution of (for example, as shown in FIG. A ratio P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect B. After the variable display result (missing) is reported, the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the ready-to-win effect E is executed. is higher than the rate P1 of changing from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestive effect is executed and the third suggestive effect is executed, the third suggestive effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestive effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player recognizes this in advance, and in the third suggestive performance and the fourth suggestive performance, the common specific image suggestive performance is appropriately executed according to the degree of expectation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 13 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 12,
The specific image suggesting effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (for example, a white round shape or a blue round shape) to a second mode (for example, a red circle), and
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development effect is executed ( For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F. A rate P3 of change in shape is set higher than a rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during execution of the ready-to-win effect A, and super reach ζ. In the variable display of the variation pattern, the ratio P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the ready-to-win effect E is active during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B. The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the display mode changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and the game can be played by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the development effect. It is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player's pre-existing recognition that the degree of expectation is high.

A gaming machine according to Mode 14 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 12 or Mode 13,
When the special suggesting effect is executed without executing the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, the developing effect executing means executes the special developing effect for the first time before the special suggesting effect is executed. It can be executed as 3 development patterns (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the reach performance A and the reach performance B are not executed). The part where the reach production development notification production is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestive effect in the third development pattern is the display of the specific image after the special suggestive effect is executed in the third development pattern. The mode is higher than the ratio of changing to the second mode (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of active display before the start of reach effect I is changed from white round or blue round to red round. part set higher than the ratio P6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the special suggestive effect, the player can easily recognize that the special suggestive effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 15 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 12 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
Reservation storage means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 20-14) capable of storing information related to the variable display as a reservation storage;
Determination means capable of determining that the development effect is to be executed when the variable display is started (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 20-17);
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage, determination means capable of determining that the development effect will be executed before the determination means is determined (for example, in the winning random number value determination process of modification 029SG-4, When the variation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, which of super reach α to super reach λ is the variation pattern of super reach (which of reach performance A to reach I is executed during variable display) the part that determines whether
with
The specific image suggesting effect executing means executes, as the specific image suggesting effect, a effect suggesting that the special development effect is to be executed and the special development effect to be executed based on the determination result of the determining means. (For example, in the modification 029SG-4, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. are provided as the display mode of the pending memory table display in addition to the round shape, and the pending memory display is any A portion that can suggest which reach effect develops among reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, and reach effect I depending on whether it is displayed in shape),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggesting effect before the start of the variable display, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the game machine of the first aspect of invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot game state),
As a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state, a special suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect I) and a first suggestive effect (for example, , ready-to-reach effect C), second suggestive effect (for example, reach-to effect D), special suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect G), suggestive effect executing means (for example, effect control A portion where the CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG.
Before the effect result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified, a special development effect can be executed as a first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, super reach In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of κ, the part where the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D), the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is executed. It is possible to execute a special development effect different from the special development effect as a second development pattern after being informed that the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display of the pattern, after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect is executed) development effect executing means (for example, effect control) A portion where the CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG.
In the first development pattern, a predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 19) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIG. part for executing the production process during variable display shown),
with
The degree of expectation differs between the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30(C), the ready-to-win effect D has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win effect C),
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the special suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, super reach κ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, and further the ready-to-win effect I is executed),
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the special suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display with the variation pattern of θ, after the variable display result (loss) is once notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect G is further executed. part),
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, a specific suggestive effect different from the special suggestive effect and the special suggestive effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, In the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach ι, the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the execution of the sign effect, and the ready-to-reach effect H is further executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-6, the variable display result is In the case of a big hit, that is, when the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected, the determination ratio of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed during the variable display is variable. A portion higher than the determination ratio of the variation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed during display),
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production (for example, the length of the execution period L7 of the high-expectation reach production development notification production is the length of the execution period of the ready-to-win production G development notification production. The part set longer than L8),
The special development effect is a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55) and an effect executed after the first effect. 20-10 and 20-55), and an effect executed after the second effect, wherein the preceding stage information is visibly displayed. a third effect (for example, the latter effects shown in FIGS. 20-10 and 20-55) in which the latter information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
A ratio at which the special development effect is executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the first suggestive effect, and a ratio at which the special development effect is executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the second suggestive effect. Different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) to 20-30 (C), when the ready-to-win production C is executed, the rate at which the high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification production is executed after the sign production is a portion higher than the rate at which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed after the sign effect when the ready-to-reach effect D is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the production by combining the types of the suggestive production and the types of the developmental production, and to provide a predetermined relationship between the suggestive production and the developmental production. You can improve your interest in directing.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed),
An advance development performance executing means capable of executing a preliminary development performance before the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed (for example, a reach performance H development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι) The part where the pre-production is executed from the timing before, and the part where the pre-production is executed from the timing before the high expectation reach production development notification production in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ),
The pre-development performance executing means can execute the common pre-development performance when the special development performance is executed and when the specific development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-51). , a part where a common aspect of pre-rendering is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed as the development performance, while increasing attention to the development performance by executing the development preliminary performance. It can improve amusement interest.

A gaming machine according to Mode 3 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 1 or Mode 2,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed),
A special development suggesting effect suggesting execution of the special development effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect of pattern Z displaying a branch destination suggesting image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5), and a specific development suggesting execution of the specific development effect A suggestive effect (for example, a branch destination suggestive effect of pattern Y in which a branch destination suggestive image 029SG005Y is displayed on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestive effect that suggests execution of both the special development effect and the specific development effect (for example, , a branch destination suggestive effect of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestive image 029SG005X on the image display device 5); A part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the special development suggesting performance, the specific development suggesting performance, and the common development suggesting performance is executed as the development suggesting performance, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3,
The second development is greater than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is performed in the first development pattern. A second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 ( As shown in D), the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, and the reach After the performance result is notified as performance C or ready-to-win performance D, the variable pattern of super-reach θ in which the ready-to-win performance G development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance G are executed, when the variable display result is a big hit, super reach κ The difference between the rate at which the ready-to-win effect C is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern and the rate to execute the ready-to-win effect D is 60%, whereas the ready-to-win effect is performed in the variable display of the super reach θ variation pattern. The portion where the difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on which one of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executed, it is the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it can be guessed whether or not the player is, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect is to be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 5 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 4,
The rate at which the first suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or substantially the same (for example, modification 029SG- As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the portion where the execution decision ratio of ready-to-win effect C and the execution decision ratio of ready-to-win effect D are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is expected that the second development pattern in which the special development performance is executed is performed in either case of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 6 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 or Embodiment 5,
The degree of expectation when the first suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the second suggestive effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the expected degree of big hit and the execution of reach effect D are determined when execution of reach effect C is determined. The part where the jackpot expectation is the same as in the case of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestive effect is executed or the second suggestive effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, an advantageous state is obtained. Since it becomes possible to expect from the game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 7 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 6,
A first advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the first suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggesting effect, and the second suggesting effect. Execution of an advantageous result suggesting effect capable of executing a second advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) suggesting that the effect result of the second suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, the part that executes the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 after the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-31);
A development suggestive effect execution means capable of executing at least a development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect (for example, a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestive effect, a reach effect G development suggestive effect) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. After determining the execution of the reach effect G development suggestive effect in the reach effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in -29, the part that executes the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG.
with
The rate at which the development suggestive effect is executed when the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern is the development suggestive effect when the second suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern. Different from the rate at which the effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modification 029SG-6, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach A portion that can determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggesting effect at a different rate than in the case of effect D),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect is different between the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, it is possible to suggest that the development suggestive effect is executed. Since it can be performed suitably, a game interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 8 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 7,
A first advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) that suggests that the effect result of the first suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggesting effect, and the second suggesting effect. Execution of an advantageous result suggesting effect capable of executing a second advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, a branch destination suggesting effect) suggesting that the effect result of the second suggesting effect will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, the part that executes the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 after the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-31);
A development suggestive effect execution means capable of executing at least a development suggestive effect suggesting execution of the special development effect (for example, a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestive effect, a reach effect G development suggestive effect) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. After determining the execution of the reach effect G development suggestive effect in the reach effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in -29, the part that executes the variable display during variable display effect process shown in FIG.
with
When the first suggestive effect is executed in the first development pattern, the ratio of execution of the first advantageous result suggestive effect during execution of the first suggestive effect is When the second suggestion effect is executed, the ratio at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-60 as modification 029SG-13, Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect I are executed before the variable display result (loss) is announced as the effect result of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D , a portion capable of determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at a different rate depending on whether the ready-to-win effect C is determined or the ready-to-win effect D is determined;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, the execution ratio of the first advantageous result suggesting effect and the second advantageous result suggesting effect suggesting that the result of the effect will be advantageous is different. Therefore, it is possible to favorably suggest the effect result, thereby improving the interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to Mode 9 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Mode 7 or Mode 8,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed),
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestive effect and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestive effect is determined after the first advantageous result suggestive effect or the second advantageous result suggestive effect is executed. is executed is higher than the relation between the performance result of the suggestive performance executed after the specific development performance or the special development performance is executed (for example, in FIG. 20-28 (A) As shown, whether or not to execute a branch destination suggesting effect and the pattern of effect are determined at different rates depending on the variation pattern of the variable display, and are not determined at different rates depending on the result of the variable display. , the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern are whether or not it develops to any of the reach effect G to the reach effect after the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed, and whether these reach effect G to the reach effect The part that is designed to be determined according to which of I develops),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development performance and the second special development performance is executed in the specific development performance or the special development performance close to the execution time of the first special development performance or the second special development performance. Therefore, by executing the first special development performance and the second special development performance, the attention to the specific development performance or the special development performance can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 10 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 7 to 9,
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before executing the specific suggestive effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed),
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed differs between before and after the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed (for example, shown in Modification 029SG-12). , the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the ready-to-win title and the action of the movable body 32 is executed in one of the ready-to-win effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect, thereby increasing attention to whether the first development pattern or the second development pattern will occur.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 11 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 7 to 10,
As the notification mode of the effect result in the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, a first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D, and the variable display ends), and after it is once notified that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modification 029SG-7, once the variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, and then again a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit;
When the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed is It is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed when the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, , As shown in Modified Example 029SG-7, when the effect result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the branch destination suggesting effect is executed in the pattern Z. and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are notified in the second notification mode, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and the effect of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect. A first advantageous result suggesting effect or a second advantageous result suggesting effect in the case where the result is notified in the first notification mode and in the case where the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect is notified in the second reporting mode. can be shared, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

A gaming machine according to Embodiment 12 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 7 to 11,
As the notification mode of the effect result in the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, a first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D, and the variable display ends), and after it is once notified that the advantageous state is not controlled. A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modification 029SG-7, once the variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, and then again a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit;
When the special development performance is executed after the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, in the suggestion performance executed after the special development performance, the The rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed when it is notified that the control is to be in an advantageous state is based on the effect result of the first suggesting effect or the second suggesting effect. Different from the rate at which the first advantageous result suggesting effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed when notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-8, reach effect C or After the ready-to-win performance D is executed and it is reported that the result of the variable display is lost as a result of the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D, the ready-to-reach performance G development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance G are executed, and the ready-to-reach performance G is executed. When it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of (when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot (PB1-7)), the variation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in is that the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode. different proportions),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed, the first advantageous result suggestion is made depending on whether or not the special development effect is executed before it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. Since the rate at which the effect or the second advantageous result suggesting effect is executed can be varied, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine according to Mode 13 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Modes 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggesting effect executing means has a plurality of advantageous result suggesting effects including the first advantageous result suggesting effect and the second advantageous result suggesting effect (for example, branch destination suggesting effects of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). is executable and
The execution ratio of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggesting effects is executed (for example, as shown in Figs. The part where the execution ratio of the high-expectation reach production development notification production differs depending on which one is executed),
During the execution of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestive effect or the special suggestive effect with the highest execution ratio of the special development effect is executed. In this case, the effect result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect being executed is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-9, When the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggesting performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, or when the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is not executed, the ready-to-reach performance I is executed, the part where the variable display result is notified that it will be a big hit),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and to draw the player's attention to whether or not the special development effect is executed when the special advantageous result suggestive effect or the special suggestive effect is executed. Since it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 20-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 029SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 20-1(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-1 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-1(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the type of the big win (probability variation or non-probability variation) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 20-1(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 20-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-2, in this characteristic portion 029SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. CPU103, for example, using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, by updating various numerical data by software, one of the random numbers MR1~MR4 Numerical data indicating the part may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 20-3 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 029SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 029SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 029SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 029SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 029SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

FIG. 20-4(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this characteristic part 029SG is based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 029SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The high-accuracy control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big hit is one of the probability variable jackpot A to the probability variable jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so the jackpot game state changes from the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state that occurs continuously without intervening.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 029SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 20-5 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 029SG. In this characteristic portion 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this characteristic portion 029SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, as super reach variation patterns, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature part 029SG is a variation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-2) that the variable display result becomes a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach α, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach β. As the variation pattern, the variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit and the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and the variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the variation pattern of super reach γ ), a variation pattern (PA2-5) in which the variable display result is out of line as the variation pattern of super reach δ, and a variation pattern in which the variable display result is out of line as the variation pattern of super reach ε. a variation pattern (PA2-6) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-5) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach ζ (PA2-7), and a variation pattern of super reach η As a variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2-8) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a variation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach θ A variation pattern (PA2-9) that is a failure, and a variation pattern (PA2-10) that is not a variation pattern (PB1-8) where the variable display result is a big hit as a variation pattern of super reach ι, and a variation pattern (PA2-10) of super reach κ A variation pattern (PA2-11) that is different from the variation pattern (PB1-9) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the variation pattern, and a variation pattern (PB1-10) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the variation pattern of the super reach λ ) and a variation pattern (PA2-12) are provided.

As shown in FIG. 20-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, since it is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit in which the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern Except for some exceptions, the longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is that of the super reach β fluctuation pattern It is set longer than the special figure variation time, and the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the special figure of the super reach ε variation pattern The variation time is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach ζ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern. , the special figure variation time of the super reach η variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach ζ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern is the same as that of the super reach η variation pattern. It is set longer than the special figure variation time, the special figure variation time of the super reach ι variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern, and the special figure of the super reach κ variation pattern The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Of these super reach α fluctuation pattern to super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern are not provided with a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win. That is, for these super reach α fluctuation pattern ~ super reach κ fluctuation pattern, for the fluctuation patterns excluding the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern, the super reach α fluctuation pattern has the shortest special figure fluctuation time and The degree of expectation for a big hit is set low, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase as the special figure fluctuation time becomes longer.

Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 029SG, a super reach λ variation pattern is provided as a super reach variation pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the super reach κ variation pattern. In the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the special figure fluctuation time is exceptionally set to be longer than the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 029SG, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-7 (A), the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is the length of the execution period as a reach effect of super reach during variable display is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect A of L1 is executed and a variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect A. As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-7 (B), the super reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a super reach performance during variable display, and the length of the execution period is L2. It is a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win effect B of (L2>L1) is executed and a variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 20-7(A) and 20-7(B), the super reach α variation pattern and the super reach β variation pattern are from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of the variable display result). Timing), it is also a variation pattern that can execute a meter effect that suggests execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect. In addition, as described above, the length L2 of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect A, so the length of the meter effect executable period in the super reach β fluctuation pattern The length L5 is set longer than the length L4 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach α variation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-7(C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. is executed, and a variable display result is notified as the effect result of these ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D. Both the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D are set to the length L3 for the execution period. Also, the super reach γ variation pattern is such that, during the execution period of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D, the ready-to-reach performance H is further executed after the variable display result is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-reach performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D. or a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect that notifies that either of the ready-to-reach effect F or the ready-to-reach effect I will be executed (which notification It is also a variation pattern that can execute a branch destination suggesting effect that suggests whether to branch to the effect.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a reach effect B with an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After informing that the variable display result is a loss, it is possible to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests the development to the reach performance E (the length of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period: L6a) , which is a variation pattern that does not eventually develop into the ready-to-win effect E and notifies the deviation. Note that the super reach δ variation pattern, like the super reach β variation pattern, is a variation in which the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the ready reach effect (the length of the period during which the meter effect can be executed: L5). This is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is a reach effect C or a reach effect D (either reach effect) as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. The length of the performance execution period is also executed L3), and after notifying that the variable display result is lost, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance G development suggesting performance to suggest the development to the ready-to-win performance G, and finally to the ready-to-win. This is a variation pattern in which deviation is notified without developing into performance G. Also, the super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggestive presentation can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-reach presentation C and the ready-to-reach presentation D.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-8(F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach performance of super reach during variable display. After executing the ready-to-reach performance B and informing that the variable display result is lost, the ready-to-reach performance E development suggesting performance can be executed, and further, the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance ( It is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect: L6b). Incidentally, the super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (the length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the ready reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period. The execution period length L6b of the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. Also, in the super reach ζ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the ready reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes reach effect A as the reach effect of super reach during variable display, A high-expectation ready-to-reach performance notifying that the ready-to-win performance A is replaced with the ready-to-win performance A in the middle of the ready-to-win performance A and developed into a ready-to-win performance with a high degree of expectation for big win (ready-to-win performance F or ready-to-win performance I to be described later in the case of this characteristic part). It is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed for a long period L7 (L7>L6b) longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the extended notification effect, and the ready-to-win effect F is executed. In addition, the super reach η variation pattern can execute a meter effect from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach effect A switches to the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect. Since the effect is switched to the effect development notification effect, the length of the meter effect executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. In addition, in the super reach η variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (notification timing of the variable display result) is the reach performance in the super reach ζ variation pattern. It is set to L12 (L12>L11), which is longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the E advanced notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. (the length of the execution period of any ready-to-win effect is also L3), and after notifying that the variable display result is lost in these ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D, the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect can be executed. Further, the ready-to-reach performance G development notification performance for notifying the development to the ready-to-reach performance G is executed over L8 (L7>L8) which is shorter than the execution period length L7 of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance. It is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect G is further executed. In addition, the super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggestive presentation can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-reach presentation C and the ready-to-reach presentation D.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. is executed, the ready-to-win performance H development notification for notifying that the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-win performance D is replaced with the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-win performance D from the middle and the advance performance and the sign performance are executed, and that the ready-to-win performance H develops further. It is a variation pattern in which the production is executed and the ready-to-win production H is executed. In addition, the super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggesting presentation can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-reach presentation C and the ready-to-reach presentation D.

As shown in FIGS. 20-5 and 20-9 (J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. is executed, a preliminary performance and a precursor performance are executed instead of the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D from the middle of the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D, and further, a high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development in which the length of the execution period is L7. It is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the ready-to-win effect I is executed. Also, the super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the branch destination suggesting presentation can be executed during the execution period of the reach presentation C and the reach presentation D. In addition, in the super reach κ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) It is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11) longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect development notification effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect F.

The super reach λ variation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a high-expectation reach performance development in which the length of the execution period is L7 from the timing before the reach in the other super reach variation patterns during variable display. It is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the ready-to-win effect I is executed. In addition, the super reach λ fluctuation pattern can execute a meter effect from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high-expectation reach production development notification effect (from the timing before the high-expectation reach production development notification Since the effect is executed, the length of the meter effect executable period is L4'', which is shorter than L4': L4>L4'>L4''). In addition, in the super reach λ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high-expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is L13 (L13 >L12>L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 (A) and 20-10 (B), as the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in this feature part 029SG, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened. A blackout effect of making the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see, a front stage effect of displaying a front line on the image display device 5 after the blackout effect, and a switching effect after the front stage effect. Then, after the switching effect, the image display device 5 displays a post-dialogue, and after the post-stage effect, the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the front of the display area of the image display device 5. and a movable body effect that causes the object to fall (movement) to the effect position that overlaps the substantially central position.

As shown in FIGS. 20-10(B) and 20-55, the front-stage effect displays the contents of the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 as the character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5. Together with this, it is an effect in which audio information is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 20-10(B) and 20-55, the latter stage effect is to display the contents of the lines spoken by the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG008 following the former stage effect. This is an effect of outputting audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(B), the line in the first stage production is "You're not alone... I'll show you everyone's power!", and the line in the second stage production is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the pre-stage production consists of a first period and a second period. During the first period, the words "I'm not alone..." In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters "You are not alone..." are displayed. In the second period, the words "I'll show you everyone's power!" A character is displayed below the character "I'm not alone...". In addition, the latter stage production is also composed of a first period and a second period. Four characters of "Miracle" are displayed. In the second period, the words "Attack!" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five characters "Attack!" Is displayed.

That is, in the front-stage production and the rear-stage production in this characteristic portion 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front-stage production is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the rear-stage production. The number of characters displayed in the second period is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the latter stage effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-10(B), the display mode of the lines in the first stage production is different from the display mode of the lines in the second stage production. It is displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and character images of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark mode, and the character image 029SG007 consisting of a plurality of characters (for example, "I'm not alone...") is gradually displayed in the first period. The character image 029SG007 displayed in a large and bright mode (fade-in) and then consisting of a plurality of characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!") gradually becomes larger and brighter in the second period. It is displayed in a different aspect (fade-in). In addition, after the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone... I'll show you everyone's power!") is displayed in the largest and brightest way, it is displayed in a manner that it gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade-out). and eventually disappear. Note that the character image 029SG007 may move while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the second stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter mode than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "ru") consisting of one character are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamically displayed) so as to rotate from the right side of the display screen to the center in order (frame-in) (dynamic display) in the first period, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, ``A'', ``Ta'', ``T'', ``Q'', and ``!'') are displayed (dynamic display) so as to move while rotating from the bottom side of the display screen toward the center in the second period (frame-in). be done. In addition, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed in the largest size and brightest, they move radially outward and then disappear outside the display screen. It is displayed in a form (frame out) that goes on.

As shown in FIG. 20-10(B), the character image 029SG007 in the front stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. . On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage effect is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), faster in movement (speed of change in display mode due to frame-in (moving speed)), and higher in brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect. displayed (see Figure 20-55).

Note that if the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the post-stage presentation are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the pre-stage presentation, the character image is fade-in or frame-in. The size and brightness of a part of may have an inverse relationship. Also, although the contents of the lines are different between the front stage production and the rear stage production, at least part of the contents may be common.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that constitutes the serif is small, but when it is larger, the degree of emphasis is higher when the image is three-dimensional than when it is two-dimensional. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the degree of emphasis is than the lower the brightness is. In the above description, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image are exemplified in a form in which the degree of emphasis is higher in the latter stage than in the former stage. The degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image should be higher than that of the character image in the preceding stage. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis is higher when the thickness of the character is thicker than when it is thin, and when the color is high when the saturation or brightness is low. good too. Furthermore, not only the display mode of the character image itself, but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to enhance the degree of emphasis.

FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic part 029SG. In this characteristic part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-6, when the variable display result is a big hit, a big-hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big-hit variation pattern determination table PB1-1. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1 -9 (super reach κ jackpot variation pattern) and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, when determining the variation pattern using the big hit variation pattern determination table, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach big hit) is set to the lowest, PB1-2 (super reach α variation pattern of big hit) , PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot variation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1-9 (super reach κ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot) (variation pattern) in order to increase the determination ratio (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table: PB1-2 < PB1-3 < PB1-4 < PB1-5 < PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same variation pattern determination table for big wins is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of the big win. However, a plurality of big hit variation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and at least two or more big hit variation pattern determination ratios are different. A plurality of big-hit variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and a variation pattern may be determined using different big-hit variation pattern determination tables according to the type of the big win. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that can be easily determined for each big win type, so that the player can be made to pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a big win. It can improve amusement interest.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern), PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach γ), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach δ), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach ε) , PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (super reach θ deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern of loss), PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach γ), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach δ), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach ε) , PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (super reach θ deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι deviation fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach γ), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach δ), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach ε) , PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation variation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation variation pattern), PA2-9 (super reach θ deviation variation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι deviation variation pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening variation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach β), PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ missing), PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach δ missing), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ε missing), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ missing) , PA2-8 (super reach η deviation variation pattern), PA2-9 (super reach θ deviation variation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι deviation variation pattern), PA2-11 (super reach κ deviation variation pattern) and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic unit 029SG is "off", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the rate of execution of variable display increases due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1 in the case of fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, fluctuation pattern judgment table B for loss If PA1-2, PA1-3 if variation pattern determination table C for loss, PA1-4 if variation pattern determination table D for loss) is set to the highest determination ratio, PA2-1 (normal reach is lost variation pattern), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ), PA2-5 (super reach δ variation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε variation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ variation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η variation pattern), PA2-9 ( Decide in order of fluctuation pattern of super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ) The ratio may be set to be low (decision ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table: PA2-12 < PA2-11 < PA2-10 < PA2-9 < PA2-8 < PA2-7 <PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each variation pattern in each variation pattern determination table as described above, for the super reach variation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α variation pattern is set to the lowest, and the super reach β variation The jackpot expectation level of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation level of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the super reach β fluctuation pattern, The expectation of jackpot with super reach ζ variation pattern is set higher than the expectation of jackpot with super reach γ variation pattern, and the expectation of jackpot with super reach η variation pattern is set higher than the expectation of jackpot with super reach ζ variation pattern. The expectation level of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the expectation level of the jackpot of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. is set higher than, super reach κ variation pattern jackpot expectation is set higher than super reach ι variation pattern jackpot expectation, super reach λ variation pattern jackpot expectation is super reach κ variation pattern It is set higher than the jackpot expectation of. As for the super reach .delta. fluctuation pattern and the super reach .epsilon. fluctuation pattern, as described above, only the fluctuation pattern for the case where the variable display result is wrong is provided, so the degree of expectation for the big hit is zero.

Next, the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, the reserved memory display that displays the variable display reserved memory number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number) so that it can be specified is displayed. . In this characteristic part 029SG, these pending displays can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and depending on which display mode the pending memory display is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is a big hit. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a pending display notice effect) that changes the rate of control in the game state (big hit expectation).

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature part 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed that can change the display mode to five levels (six levels if the meter effect non-execution state is included) as the above-described meter effect. .

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 029SG, there is a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 20-12 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 029SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 029SG153, a game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 029SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 029SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 029SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 029SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 029SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 029SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 12 stores production control data as shown in FIG. Area 029SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 20-13 (A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 029SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 029SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 029SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 029SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 029SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 029SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning command buffer 029SG194A of the characteristic part 029SG, the determination of the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process (Fig. 20-20) is undecided. Whether or not, that is, due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the flag value corresponding to the starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in a normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the reading announcement effect is determined, "1" (blue circle ) or "2" (red circle) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U. , in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the command buffer 029SG194A received at the time of start winning shown in FIG. 20-13 (B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination processing of the characteristic portion 029SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 15 will be described based on FIG. 20-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029 SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 029SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 029SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" ( step 029 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 029 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 029SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" ( step 029 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 029 SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 029 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step 029 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 029 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 029SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 20-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 029 SGS112 of FIG. 20-14 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic portion 029SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 15, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 15, FIGS. 20-17), which will be described later, the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 029 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 029 SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 20-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 029SGS109 in FIG. 20-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at step 029SGS123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display. In this case, the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "off", is executed (step 029 SGS128), and whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, , It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 029 SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 029 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, when it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 20-15(A) , based on the random number value MR2 for judging the type of the big hit, the type of the big hit is determined (step 029 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and the 5th symbol designation command if it is a non-variable hit (step 029SGS133), selects and sets the variation pattern determination table for the big hit (step 029SGS135), step 029 Go to SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of steps 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are used to A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 029 SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 029SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 20-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 20-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step 029SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 029SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 029SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 029 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 029 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 029SGS144), it moves to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 029SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, read the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the processing of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 029SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 029 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 029 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 029SGS148), it moves to step 029SGS149.

In step 029 SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set a table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 029SGS150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , in the process of step 029 SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value) special figure display result is determined as a ``big hit'', when the game state is a high-probability state, it is determined (determined) as a ``big hit'' with a higher probability than when it is a low-probability state.

When it is judged to be a "big hit" at step 029SGS150a (step 029SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 turns on the big hit flag (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-4(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 029 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “probability variable jackpot B”, “probability variable jackpot C”, which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, determines which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 029 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type memorize As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

After the end of step 029SGS155, or when it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" at step 029SGS150a (step 029SGS150a; N), whether to control to the jackpot game state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on) ), a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 029SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 029SGS154 is "variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 029SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 029SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 20-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 15 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination in step 029SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the game state is changed by determining whether the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is performed in the state or the time saving state (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 029 SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 029 SGS169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, storage of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading the value or the like, the number of reserved storage of the fluctuation special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storage of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 029 SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 029 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected as the table used for determining one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (step 029 SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 029 SGS172; N), the variation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as the table used for determining .

After executing any of the processing of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation random number buffer Based on, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for big hit, variation pattern determination table for special hit, or variation pattern determination table for loss A to D, any of a plurality of types of variation patterns (Step 029SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 029SGS175. That is, the process of step 029 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 029 SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 029 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit The data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 029SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 029SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

FIG. 20-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 029SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029 SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag to turn them off (step 029SGS184). , a winning start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a winning start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a winning start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the types of jackpots stored in the performance control board 12; The setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 029 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win in the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (step 029 SGS187). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (step 029 SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029 SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), at step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 029 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 029 SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 029SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time saving flag After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029 SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 20-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 15 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (step 029SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 029 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 029 SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not the non-probability variation jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". is set (step 029SGS209), the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 029 SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is performed (step 029SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 029 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 20-20 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of FIG. 15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 20-20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning (step 029SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. is determined by whether or not there is an entry in which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029 SGS242).

If there is no entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. Y), furthermore, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a failure (step 029 SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command indicates a big win (step 029 SGS243; N), based on the fact that the variable display result is a big win, a big win time (not shown) is executed. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect (step 029 SGS245).

In step 029 SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 20-21(A). Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (forecast type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circular shape in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, When the display pattern (notice type) of the prefetching notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a red round shape in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U. be.

In step 029 SGS245, as shown in FIG. 20-21(A), for example, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pre-reading notice effect display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead advance notice effect may be determined at a rate of 65%.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry in which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command indicates a loss (step 029SGS243; Y), The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry is specified (step 029 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 029SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 029 SGS248).

At step 029 SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 20-21(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-21 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 029SGS247, the execution of the pre-reading preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) are set. making it different.

In step 029 SGS247, as shown in FIG. 20-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is lost and the variable category is "non-reach", non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. , execution of the display pattern α of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is "Others", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 75%, and the execution with the display pattern α of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%. Execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%. Then, when the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%, and the execution with the display pattern α of the pre-reading notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%. , and execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead preview effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

With such a setting, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the variable display result has a higher ratio of being a big hit than when the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, so it is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit when the pre-reading notice effect is executed with the display pattern β than when the display pattern α is executed. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect is displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect and the display pattern are determined at the same rate regardless of the big win type, but the present invention is limited to this. If the result of the variable display is a big win instead, the presence/absence of execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be changed according to the type of the big win. By doing so, the player can be controlled to which jackpot type jackpot game state depending on whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed and which display pattern the pending memory display is displayed. It is possible to attract attention.

After the execution of step 029SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 029SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 029SGS249).

After execution of step 029 SGS245 or when it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step 029 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (announcement type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending storage display with a blue circular shape, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display in a red circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252. .

Further, at step 029SGS249, if execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 029SGS249; N), after setting the suspension display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white round shape (step 029SGS250 ), go to step 029 SGS252.

In addition, after step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be.

FIGS. 20-22 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of FIG. 19 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 20-22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 029SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 029SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 029 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 029 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 029 SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, as a stop symbol , and a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes meter effect determination processing for determining whether or not the meter effect is to be executed and the effect pattern (step 029 SGS277), and determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern. Judge (step 029 SGS278). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern may be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029 SGS275 is the super reach variation pattern.

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y) further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS280).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029 SGS281; Y), a ready reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed. Then proceed to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282), and if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS281; N), Without executing reach effect E development notification effect determination processing, the process proceeds to step 029 SGS283.

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the variation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS280; Y), branch A branch destination suggestive effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a previous suggestive effect and the effect pattern is executed (step 029 SGS284). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach ε or If it is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), a reach performance G development suggestive effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the ready reach effect G development suggestive effect is executed (step 029SGS286). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win to be executed during the variable display from the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D according to the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 029 SGS287). A process table corresponding to the ready-to-win effect and variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029 SGS287, if the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ι (PB1-8), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. %, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ε (PA2-6), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), execution of ready-to-win effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 20-30(A) and 20-30(B), the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D are executed according to the variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. As shown in FIG. 20-30(C), the ready-to-win effect D is set higher than the ready-to-win effect C as an overall big hit expectation degree by determining with different ratios.

In addition, regardless of the result of the variable display, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach ι (variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect H are executed after the preliminary effect and the sign effect are executed). , execution of the ready-to-win effect D is always determined. On the other hand, when variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach κ (variation pattern in which high-expectation reach production development notification production and reach production I are executed after execution of advance production and precursor production), reach There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the ready-to-win effect D is executed.

That is, in the present feature part 029SG, regarding the variation pattern (the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variation pattern of super reach κ) in which the preliminary effect and the precursor effect are executed during the variable display, the present feature In the part 029, the rate at which the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed (the rate at which the ready-to-win effect I with the highest jackpot expectation is executed) is higher than the ready-to-win effect D when the execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined. is set higher than if it is decided to run Therefore, in the present characteristic part 029SG, even if the ready-to-win effect C having a lower degree of expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win effect D is executed during the variable display, the preliminary effect and the sign effect are executed after the ready-to-win effect C. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the ready-to-win performance C is executed, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for the big win is low when the ready-to-win performance C is executed, and the amusement of the game is lowered during the execution of the ready-to-win performance C.例文帳に追加It is designed to prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the ready-to-reach effect G developmental notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, and these during the execution of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D. When comparing the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which the advance performance, the sign performance, and the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance are executed instead of the reach performance C and the reach performance D, as shown in Fig. 20-30 (D). In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination ratio of the reach effect D in the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, while the super reach κ The difference between the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D in the variation pattern is set to 60%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-30(E), when the variable display result is lost, the difference between the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40. %, the difference between the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

Therefore, when the variable display results in a big win, the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ are determined depending on whether the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed. The variable display is a super ready-to-reach κ variable display in which advance performance, sign performance, and high-expectation ready-to-reach performance notification performance are executed during the execution of ready-to-reach performance C and ready-to-reach performance D, or as ready-to-reach performance C and ready-to-reach performance D. After the variable display result (loss) is notified once, it is possible to guess whether it is a variable display of super reach θ in which the reach effect G developmental notification effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which one is to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 20-22, in step 029 SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit during the variable display (big hit expectation) is increased, and the chance. A chance-up effect determination process for determining the effect pattern of the up effect is executed (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 next starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

Each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operating units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 213SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, in the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the process timer has timed out. do. Then, when the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the next step is performed. It suffices to start the process timer and control the production device according to the contents of the following process data. By doing so, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the characteristic portion 029SG.

FIG. 20-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 20-22 as the meter effect determination processing. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι or super reach κ. It is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern (step 029 SGS301). If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), meter effect determination processing is terminated, If the variation pattern of the variable display is any of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS301; N) determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029 SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination processing is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. , super reach .delta., super reach .zeta., super reach .eta., and super reach .lambda. A production pattern is determined (step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), when the variation pattern is a non-reach (non-reduced non-reach) variation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%, Execution of meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, pattern E of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. do. Further, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of normal reach, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, execution of the pattern A of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 25%, and pattern B of the meter effect is determined. is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect pattern Execution in E is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution in pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, if the variation pattern is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ, non-execution of meter effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern A of meter effect is determined. is determined at a rate of 5%, execution at pattern B of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 15%, execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the meter effect pattern Execution in D is determined at a rate of 30%, execution in pattern E of meter presentation is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution in pattern F of meter presentation is decided at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach η, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of pattern A of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the meter effect is performed. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance is determined. is determined at a rate of 95%, and the rate at which the pattern F of the meter effect is performed is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variation pattern is the super reach λ variation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is performed. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance is determined. is determined at a rate of 0%, and the rate at which the pattern F of the meter effect is performed is determined at a rate of 100%.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 20-24 (B) and 20-25, the pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening, from the start of the variable display It is a production pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period until the variable display result notification), and pattern B is the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach fluctuation without shortening If it is a pattern, it is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (a total of two steps) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the result of the variable display. , Pattern C is the first timing, the second timing, and the period from reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach, the period from reach to variable display result notification). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (increase by three steps in total).

In pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing during execution of the ready-to-win effect A or the ready-to-win effect B (a total of four steps are increased). ) is the production pattern. Pattern E is the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect start and stop) that is during execution of the reach effect A and the fifth timing after the fourth timing. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect (increase by 5 steps in total). Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 20-23, after executing the processing of 029SGS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the meter effect is determined (step 029SGS304). If the execution of the meter effect is not determined (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and if the execution of the meter effect is determined (step 029SGS304; Y), the effect pattern of the determined meter effect is stored. Then (step 029SGS305), a meter effect start waiting timer corresponding to the variation pattern is set, and the meter effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS306).

When the execution of the meter effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the value of the meter effect start waiting timer Determine whether or not it is out. At this time, when the meter effect start waiting timer times out, the process table for meter effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the meter effect is selected, and the process timer for meter effect is started. Thereafter, the value of the meter effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter effect process timer has timed out. When the meter effect process timer has not timed out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the content of the process data corresponding to the meter effect process timer, and when the meter effect process timer has timed out, the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, the meter effect can be executed during the variable display.

As described above, in the characteristic part 029SG, by executing the meter effect during the variable display, whether or not the meter 029SG005M is increased to 5 levels, and by increasing the meter 029SG005M to 5 levels, a high expected reach is achieved. Effect development It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the effect is executed.

FIG. 20-26 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. In the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 20-26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029 SGS311). . For example, as shown in FIG. 20-26(B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ, non-execution of reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, Reach production E Execution of development suggestive production is determined at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ζ, non-execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined to be 80%. determined by the ratio of

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS311 (step 029SGS312). If execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is not determined (step 029 SGS312; N), the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect decision processing is terminated, and if execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is determined (step 029 SGS312) ;Y) sets a ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect start waiting timer and ends the ready-to-win effect E-development suggestive effect determination processing (step 029 SGS313).

When execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the effect E development suggestion effect has timed out. At this time, when the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance start waiting timer runs out, the process table for the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-win performance E development suggesting performance is started. After that, the value of the process timer for the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the ready-to-win effect E-development suggestive effect has timed out. . When the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer, and the ready reach performance E development suggestion performance is performed. When the process timer for the timer runs out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the ready-to-win effect E advanced notification effect is executed rather than the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach δ in which the ready-to-win effect E advanced notification effect is not executed is performed. Since the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of these super reach δ and super reach ζ, the ready-to-reach effect E development is executed after the ready-to-reach effect B is executed. The player's attention is made to see whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 20-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 20-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestive effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029 SGS321). .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-28(A), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach γ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , execution of pattern X of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined. Determined at a rate of 0%. Also, if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. Execution of the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach θ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. Execution of the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 15%, and execution of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%. Execution of the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach κ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. Execution of the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 20-28(B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, and the execution of the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect. It is a production pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestive image X suggesting both execution of a high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification production, and a pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive production is a ready-to-reach production C or a ready-to-reach production D in the image display device 5. is a production pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestive image Y suggesting the execution of the ready-to-reach production H development notification production during the execution period of the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive production is the ready-to-reach production C or the ready-to-reach production in the image display device 5 This is an effect pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestion image Z that suggests execution of a high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect during the execution period of D.

Incidentally, in the characteristic part 029SG, among the pattern X to pattern Z, the pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than the pattern X and the pattern Y when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. In other words, pattern Z is a production pattern with a higher degree of expectation for execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification production than pattern X and pattern Y (expectation to execute high-expectation reach production development information production: pattern Z > pattern Y , pattern Z > pattern X). In addition, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern X or pattern X when the ready-to-win effect H development notification effect is executed. This is an effect pattern with a high execution expectation of the developmental notification effect (ready-to-win effect H, execution expectation of the developmental notification effect: pattern Y>pattern Z, pattern Y>pattern X).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-28(A), whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion effect and the pattern of effect are determined at different ratios according to the variation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the result of the variable display. the proportions are not different. In other words, the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern are whether or not it develops to any of the reach effect G to the reach effect I after the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed, and whether these reach effect G to the reach effect However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern are determined by the variable display. The determination ratio may differ depending on both the variation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may differ only according to the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 20-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the branch destination suggesting effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). If execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is not determined (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestive effect determination process is terminated, and if execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined (step 029SGS232; Y), the determined branch The effect pattern of the destination suggestive effect is stored (step 029SGS323), the branch destination suggestive effect start waiting timer is set, and the branch destination suggestive effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS324).

When the execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestive effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestive effect. Determines whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer times out, the branch destination suggestion effect process table corresponding to the determined branch destination suggestion effect effect pattern is selected, and the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is started. Let Thereafter, the value of the process timer for branch destination suggestion effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for branch destination suggestion effect has timed out. When the process timer for branch destination suggestion rendering has not timed out, control of the rendering device is executed according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for branch destination suggestion rendering, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion rendering has timed out. If so, switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 029SG, any one of the branch destination suggestive image X, the branch destination suggestive image Y, and the branch destination suggestive image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D. , the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D can draw the player's attention to switching to the preliminary effect without being notified of the variable display result. Further, a pre-rendering is performed according to which of the branch destination suggesting image X, the branch destination suggesting image Y, and the branch destination suggesting image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D. And since the ratio of execution of the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect after the sign effect and the ratio of execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect are different, the image display device 5 displays the branch destination suggesting image X and the branch destination. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the suggestive image Y and the branch destination suggestive image Z is to be displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 20-29 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. In the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-29(B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ε, non-execution of reach effect G development suggestion effect is 50%. , and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect G development suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach θ, non-execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at 80%. determined by the ratio of

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect has been determined in the process of step 029SGS331 (step 029SGS332). If execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect is not determined (step 029SGS332; N), the ready-to-win effect G developmental suggestive effect determination processing is terminated, and if execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect is determined (step 029SGS332) ; Y) sets a timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggesting effect, and ends the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggesting effect determination processing (step 029 SGS333).

When execution of the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggesting effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the ready-to-win effect G exhibition suggesting effect start waiting timer by -1 every time the effect processing during variable display is executed. It is determined whether or not the value of the waiting timer for the start of the performance G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out. At this time, when the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance is timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach performance G exhibition suggesting performance is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestive effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestive effect has timed out. . When the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the control of the performance device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance process timer, and the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance is performed. When the process timer for the timer runs out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect during the variable display.

Especially in this characteristic part 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach performance G notification performance is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach performance G exhibition notification performance is not executed. Since the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect is executed at a rate, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, the ready-to-reach effect G develops after the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D are executed. The player's attention is focused on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

FIG. 20-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 20-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 20-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029 SGS340). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029 SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, Further, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029 SGS341).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029 SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS342).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS342; N), the variable It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029 SGS343). If the variable display variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029 SGS343; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect A according to the result of the variable display. The presence or absence and effect pattern are determined (step 029 SGS344).

20-32(A) to 20-32(E), the contents of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect I in the characteristic portion 029SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 20-32(A) to 20-32(I), reach effect A to reach effect I are each a reach title display period during which the title of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a battle effect execution period for displaying the battle effect between the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5 thereafter.

During the ready-to-win title display periods of the ready-to-win effects A to I, the ready-to-win titles can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 20-33(A)).

In addition, for the battle effect execution period of the ready-to-reach effect A to the ready-to-reach effect D, a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body operable period in which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle effect execution period. A cut-in image displayable period is provided, and the movable body 32 can be moved during the movable body operable period and the cut-in image can be displayed during the cut-in image displayable period as part of the chance-up effect. (See Fig. 20-33(A)).

Regarding the battle effect execution period of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D, a branch destination suggesting effect executable period is provided after the movable body operable period and the cut-in image displayable period.

In addition, regarding the battle execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect F, the movable body operable period is provided in the first half of the battle effect execution period, and the second half of the battle effect execution period (end of the battle effect) In the vicinity of the timing), an operation prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A in the image display device 5 is performed. An operation prompting image display period for displaying the prompting image is provided. Note that the operation promotion image display period is a period during which the image of the push button 31B is normally displayed.

In this characteristic portion 029SG, during the battle execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect F, as part of the chance-up effect, the action of the movable body during the movable body operable period and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period are performed. can be displayed (see FIG. 20-33(B)).

Note that the ready-to-reach effect G, the ready-to-reach effect H, and the ready-to-reach effect I are not provided with a movable body operable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period. That is, the ready-to-win effect G, the ready-to-win effect H, and the ready-to-win effect I are the ready-to-win effects in which the chance-up effect is not executed.

Returning to step 029 SGS344 in FIG. 20-31, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at 0%. Determined by percentage. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution in pattern R of chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect A has been determined (step 029 SGS345). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect A has not been determined (step 029SGS345; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS347, and execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A is determined (step 029SGS345; Y). stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

At step 029SGS347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α (step 029 SGS347; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect F and the effect pattern according to the result of the variable display (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-34(B), when the result of the variable display is a loss, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 10%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in T is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution in pattern U of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect F has been determined (step 029 SGS349). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect F is not determined (step 029 SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F is determined. (Step 029SGS349; Y) The determined effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for ready-to-win effect F is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance-up effect determination process is terminated (Step 029SGS350).

In step 029SGS343, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the effect control CPU 120 produces a reach effect according to the variable display result. Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect being executed and the effect pattern are determined (step 029 SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-34(C), if the result of the variable display is a loss, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at a rate of 10%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution in pattern R of chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect B is determined (step 029 SGS352). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect B has not been determined (step 029SGS352; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS354, and execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B is determined (step 029SGS352; Y). stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

At step 029SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029 SGS354; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ. If there is (step 029SGS354; Y), whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E and the effect pattern are determined according to the result of the variable display (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-34(D), if the result of the variable display is a loss, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern T is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern S is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in T is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution in pattern U of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E has been determined (step 029 SGS356). If execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect E is not determined (step 029 SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and execution of the chance-up effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect E is determined. (Step 029SGS356; Y) The determined effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for ready-to-win effect E is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance-up effect determination process is terminated (Step 029SGS357).

Also, in the process of step 029SGS342, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS342; Y), the effect The control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of the variation patterns of the super reach γ and the super reach ε (step 029 SGS358).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is If it is the variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach ε (step 029 SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed according to the variable display result. A production pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-34(A), when the ready-to-win effect to be executed is the ready-to-reach effect C, if the variable display result is a loss, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is set at a rate of 60%. , the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the chance-up performance pattern R is determined. Determined at a rate of 0%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution in pattern R of chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-34(C), when the ready-to-win effect to be executed is the ready-to-reach effect D and the result of the variable display is a loss, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern Q is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the chance-up performance pattern R is determined at 10%. determined by the ratio of When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance pattern P is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up performance is determined. Execution in Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution in pattern R of chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is determined (step 029 SGS360). If the execution of the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect C or D is not determined (step 029 SGS360; N), the chance-up effect determination processing is terminated, and the chance-up effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect C or D is executed. (step 029 SGS360; Y), the decided production pattern is stored, and a chance-up production start timer for ready-to-win production C or ready-to-reach production D is set according to the variation pattern, and chance-up production determination processing is performed. is terminated (step 029 SGS361).

When execution of the chance-up effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting to start the chance-up effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and sets the timer to wait for the start of the chance-up effect. Determines if the value has timed out. At this time, when the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up effect runs out, the process table for the chance-up effect is selected and the process timer for the chance-up effect is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for chance-up effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for chance-up effect has timed out. When the chance-up effect process timer has not timed out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the content of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and when the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. , the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the chance-up effect can be executed during the variable display.

Especially in this characterizing part 029SG, whether or not the chance-up performance is executed or not, and whether the chance-up performance is executed or not, because the degree of expectation for the big win differs depending on the number of times the chance-up performance is executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win performance. In any case, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of times the chance-up performance is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the ready-to-win performances such as the ready-to-win performance A to the ready-to-win performance D where the expectation of the big hit is relatively low, the chance-up performance is executed three times at maximum, so the chance-up performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance A to the ready-to-win performance D. It is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the variable display result will be a big hit according to the number of times of execution.

On the other hand, in ready-to-win performances such as ready-to-win performances G to ready-to-reach performances I with high expectations for big hits, the chance-up performance that can be executed during the ready-to-win performance is only once, so the chance-up performance is repeated multiple times. It is possible to prevent the performance interest of the ready-to-win performance with a high expectation of a big hit from being lowered by the execution.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-34(E), among the production patterns of the chance-up production in the ready-to-win production A to D, the pattern P displays the ready-to-win title in red, but the movable body 32 does not move. A production pattern in which no cut-in image is displayed, pattern Q is a production pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is operated, but no cut-in image is displayed, and pattern R is a production pattern in which the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red. This is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-34(F), among the production patterns of the chance-up production in the ready-to-reach production E and the ready-to-reach production F, the pattern S displays the ready-to-reach title in red, but the movement of the movable body 32 is different. The pattern Q is an effect pattern in which the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed. Pattern Q is a effect pattern in which the ready-to-win title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is moved, but the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed. , the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A.

As described above, as the chance-up effect of this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. The degree of expectation for a big win is set to be lowest when the performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is set higher when the chance-up performance is executed in pattern P than when the chance-up performance is not executed. there is When the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern Q, the degree of expectation for big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern P. - 特許庁Then, when the chance-up performance is executed in pattern R, the degree of expectation for the big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in pattern Q (the chance-up performance in the ready-to-win performances A to D is set to be higher). Expectation: pattern R>pattern Q>pattern P>non-execution).

In addition, as a whole chance-up effect in the ready-to-win effect E and the ready-to-win effect F, when the chance-up effect is not executed, the expectation of the big hit is set to be the lowest, and when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S, The degree of expectation for a big hit is set higher than when the chance-up performance is not executed. When the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern T, the degree of expectation for the big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern S.例文帳に追加When the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern RU, the expectation for the big win is set higher than in the case where the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern T (the chance-up performance in the ready-to-win performance E and the ready-to-win performance F is set to be higher). Expectation: pattern U>pattern T>pattern S>non-execution).

Here, when the ready-to-reach effect A to D are executed and the case to execute the ready-to-reach effect E or the ready-to-reach effect F is executed, the pattern P and the pattern Q are common in the ready-to-reach effect A to D. Pattern R is executable only when ready-to-win effect B or ready-to-win effect D is executed. In other words, the red display of the ready-to-reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in any of the ready-to-reach effects A to D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is only in the ready-to-reach effects B and D. It is a rendition that can be performed.

Further, when the ready-to-reach effect E is executed and the ready-to-reach effect F is executed, the pattern S and the pattern T are commonly set as executable effect patterns in the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect F. On the other hand, the pattern U can be executed only when the ready-to-win effect F is executed. That is, the red display of the ready-to-reach title and the action of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in either the ready-to-reach effect E or the ready-to-reach effect F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promoting image is the ready-to-reach effect F It is a rendition that can only be performed in

Next, an effect mode of variable display of Super Reach in this characteristic portion 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-35 to 20-56. First, the case where the ready-to-win effect A is executed as the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win will be described. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed in a state where it has not increased by even one step. As shown in FIGS. 20-35(A) to 20-35(D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature part 029SG, when the pattern D or pattern E is determined to be executed, ), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach, which is the timing before the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 20-35(E) and 20-35(F), when the ready-to-win effect A is started, first, the title image of the ready-to-win effect A and the big hit expectation of the ready-to-win effect A are displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation degree image 029SG251 indicating the degree of expectation is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been determined, a title image 029SG161A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect A, while one of pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG161B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect A ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 20-35(G). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-36(H), even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M is further incremented by one step at the fourth timing.

Also, during the battle effect, if execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, as shown in FIG. An action toward the performance position is executed. The movement of the movable body 32 as the chance-up effect is movement from the origin position toward the effect position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the effect position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, as shown in FIGS. is displayed.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is lost, as shown in FIGS. As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character A wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance A) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination showing the big win.

Also, when the variable display is super reach η variable display, as shown in FIGS. The meter 029SG005M further increases by one step (up to 5 steps) and becomes full. Then, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (full) and that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be executed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (R), the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and instead of the battle effect, a high-expectation reach effect development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect. 029SG180 is displayed. Then, the ready-to-win effect F is started. Details of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 20-55.

As shown in FIGS. 20-37 (S) and 20-37 (T), when the ready-to-win effect F is started, first, the title image of the ready-to-win effect F and the big hit expectation of the ready-to-win effect A are displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation degree image 029SG256 indicating the degree of expectation is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been determined, a title image 029SG166A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect F, while any one of pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U is displayed. When execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG166B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect F.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect F ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B starts as shown in FIG. 20-37(U). During the battle production, when execution of the chance-up production is determined in the production pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in FIGS. An operation (movement) of the body 32 is performed from the origin position toward the intermediate position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

20-38(X), FIG. 20-38(Y), and FIG. 20-38(Z), for the player in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 An operation prompting image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, when execution of the chance-up effect has not been determined in the effect pattern of the pattern U, while the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern of the pattern U. When execution is determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation accepting period of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is reported as the effect result.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach η deviation variation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character B as a result of the production, it is notified that the result of the variable display is a loss, and after the battle production (ready-to-win production F) is completed, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss. be.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character B wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance F) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination showing the big win.

Next, the case where the ready-to-win effect B is executed as the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win will be described. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed in a state where it has not increased by even one step. As shown in FIGS. 20-40(A) to 20-40(D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this characteristic part 029SG, when the pattern D or pattern E is determined to be executed, ), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach, which is the timing before the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 20-40(E) and 20-40(F), when the ready-to-win effect B is started, first, the title image of the ready-to-win effect B and the big hit expectation of the ready-to-win effect B are displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation degree image 029SG252 indicating the degree of expectation is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect is not determined, a title image 029SG162A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect B, while one of pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R is displayed. When execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG162B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect B ends, a battle effect between the friend character B and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 20-40(G). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-41(H), even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M is further incremented by one step at the fourth timing.

Also, during the battle effect, if execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, as shown in FIG. A movement (movement) to an intermediate position is performed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, as shown in FIGS. is displayed.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which super reach β is lost, as shown in FIGS. As a result, when the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the result of the variable display is lost, and after the battle performance (ready performance B) is finished, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in FIGS. 20-41 (N) and 20-41 (O), the battle production When the ally character B wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is notified that the variable display result is a big win, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance B) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination showing the big win.

In addition, when the variable display is super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 2. When the friend character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is temporarily notified that the result of the variable display is wrong.

After the battle effect (ready-to-win effect B) is finished, a swinging display is performed with a combination indicating the misalignment of the decorative symbols. At this time, when execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect is determined, as shown in FIG. The ready-to-win effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

Incidentally, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. After stopping, it is reported again that the variable display is incorrect. On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. As an effect, a reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, the ready-to-win effect E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 20-42(U) and 20-42(V), when the ready-to-win effect E is started, first, the title image of the ready-to-win effect E and the big hit expectation of the ready-to-win effect E are displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation degree image 029SG255 indicating the degree of expectation is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect is not determined, a title image 029SG165A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect E, while one of pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U is displayed. When execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG165B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect E ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B starts as shown in FIG. 20-42(W). During the battle production, when execution of the chance-up production is determined in the production pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in FIGS. An operation (movement) of the body 32 is performed from the origin position toward the intermediate position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

When the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 20-43(Z), 20-43(a), and 20-43(b), a An operation prompting image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, when execution of the chance-up effect has not been determined in the effect pattern of the pattern U, while the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern of the pattern U. When execution is determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation accepting period of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is reported as the effect result.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach ζ deviation variation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character B as a result of the production, it is notified that the result of the variable display is a loss, and after the battle production (ready-to-win production E) is completed, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss. be.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character A wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance E) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination showing the big win.

20-42(Q) to 20-42(T) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-45(A) to 20-45(B), when the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect is determined to be executed, the decorative patterns are oscillatingly displayed in a combination indicating failure. In this state, as the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect, the first-stage display of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 is performed so as to overlap the decoration pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the first-stage ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 is less visible to the player than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative patterns, such as having a lower brightness and a smaller display color. Any image is acceptable.

After the end of the display period of the first stage of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting image 029SG170, as shown in FIGS. After finishing the display of , the second stage display of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decoration pattern. The second-stage ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 is higher in brightness than the first-stage reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170, and has more display colors. Any image may be used as long as it has a higher visibility from the player.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. An image 029SG181 is displayed and the ready-to-win effect E is executed.

Next, the case where the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be described. When the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed as the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the meter effect is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win is omitted.

Regarding the case where the ready-to-win effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. title image and an expectation degree image 029SG253 indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit of the ready-to-win effect C are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect is not determined, a title image 029SG163A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect C, while any one of pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R is displayed. When execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG163B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect C ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 20-46(C).

On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. A title image of the ready-to-win effect D and an expectation degree image 029SG254 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect D are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect is not determined, a title image 029SG164A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect D, while any one of pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern 2, a title image 029SG164B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the ready-to-win effect D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the ready-to-win effect D ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character A starts as shown in FIG. 20-46(F).

Also, during the battle production of these ready-to-reach production C or ready-to-reach production D, if execution of the chance-up production is determined in the production pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, FIG. 20-47 (G) and FIG. As indicated by 47(H), the operation (movement) of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, when execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, as shown in FIGS. is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-47(K) to 20-47-(M), when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the cut during the battle effect of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D After the in-image displayable period, the image display device 5 executes the ready-to-win effect H developmental notification effect (ready-to-win effect H) and the high-expectation ready-to-win effect developmental notification effect (ready-to-win effect I) on the image display device 5 as a branch destination suggesting effect. A branch destination suggesting image X (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005X) that suggests both of the above and a branch destination suggesting image Y (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005Y), or a branch destination suggesting image Z (branch destination suggesting image 029SG005Z) suggesting that the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect (ready-to-win effect I) will be executed.

After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, if the variable display is a variable display in the super reach γ deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), FIGS. 20-48 (N) to 20-48 (P ), when the ready-to-win effect C is executed, as a result of the battle effect, the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character A, and it is notified that the variable display is lost, and when the ready-to-win effect D is executed If so, it is notified that the variable display is lost by the defeat of the friend character D by the enemy character A as a result of the battle presentation. After the battle effect (ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in FIGS. When C is executed, it is announced that the friendly character C wins over the enemy character A and that the variable display is a big hit as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the ready-to-win effect D is executed, the effect result of the battle effect. When the friend character D wins against the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit. After the battle effect (ready-to-win effect C or ready-to-win effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure.

Also, when the variable display is super reach ε or super reach θ variable display, as shown in FIGS. When ally character C or ally character D is defeated by enemy character A later, it is temporarily notified that the result of the variable display is wrong.

After the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, a swing display is performed in a combination indicating the misalignment of the decorative symbols. At this time, when execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect is determined, as shown in FIG. The ready-to-win effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

Incidentally, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. After stopping, it is reported again that the variable display is incorrect. On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. As an effect, a ready-to-win effect G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, the ready-to-win effect G is started.

As shown in FIG. 20-50 (Z), when the ready-to-win effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the ready-to-win effect G and the expectation degree image 029SG257 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect G are displayed on the image display device 5 first. is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the ready-to-win effect G ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 20-50(a) and 20-50(b). . Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach θ deviation variation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in FIGS. As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is reported that the result of the variable display is lost, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character C wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance G) is finished, decorative patterns are stop-displayed in a combination showing the big win.

20-49(V) to FIG. 20-49(Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-54(A) to 20-54(B), when execution of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect is determined, the decorative patterns are oscillatingly displayed in a combination indicating failure. In this state, as the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting effect, the first-stage display of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting image 029SG171 is performed so as to overlap the decoration pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the first-stage ready-to-win production G development suggestive image 029SG171 is less visible to the player than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative patterns, such as having lower brightness and less display colors. Any image is acceptable.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the ready-to-win effect G development suggesting image 029SG171 ends, as shown in FIGS. After finishing the display of , the second stage display of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decoration pattern. The second-stage ready-to-reach performance G development suggestive image 029SG171 is higher in brightness than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestive image 029SG171, has more display colors, etc., and the first-stage ready-to-reach performance G development suggestive image 029SG171. Any image may be used as long as it has a higher visibility from the player.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. An image 029SG182 is displayed and the ready-to-win effect G is executed.

In addition, when the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ι or the variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period during execution of C or reach effect D, a shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary effect (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area The moving display of the shutter image 029SG006 is performed toward the camera), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the preliminary effect ends based on the lapse of the predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect. As the shutter image 029SG006 is retracted, the image of the character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. After the image 029SG183 is displayed, the ready-to-win effect H is executed. Further, when the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIG. After the ready-to-win effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the ready-to-win effect I is executed. Details of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 20-55.

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. A title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H and an expectation degree image 029SG258 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect H are displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character C is started as shown in FIGS. 20-52(l) and 20-52(m). . Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-10) in which the super reach ι is lost, as shown in FIGS. As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is reported that the variable display result is lost, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance H) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ι jackpot variation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in FIGS. When the ally character D wins over the enemy character C as a performance result, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance H) is finished, the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination showing the big win.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. When the ready-to-win effect I is started in the notification effect control, the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-win effect I and the expectation degree image 029SG259 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit of the ready-to-win effect I are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, on the image display device 5, the images of the characters A to C are displayed behind the title image 029SG169 and the degree-of-expectation image 029SG259 of the ready-to-win effect I, so that the ready-to-win effect I is of another super ready-to-win. A special feeling due to the high expectation of a big hit is produced rather than the ready-to-win production.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-win effect I ends, as shown in FIGS. is started. Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), as shown in FIG. 20-53 (v) and FIG. As a result, ally character A to ally character D are defeated by enemy character C, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and after the battle presentation (ready presentation H) is completed, a combination of decorative patterns indicating failure is displayed in a stopped manner. be done.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in FIGS. When allied characters A to D win against the enemy character C as a performance result, it is reported that the variable display result is a big win, and after the battle performance (ready-to-win performance H) is completed, the decoration patterns stop with a combination indicating a big win. Is displayed.

Here, FIG. 20-37 (R) ~ FIG. 20-37 (T), FIG. 20-53 (r) ~ FIG. .

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-55 (A) to 20-55 (B), when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is started, the ready-to-reach effect F or the reach effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification image 029SG180 for notifying that I will be executed is displayed. Furthermore, after the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. is executed.

In the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (variable display images of decoration patterns, character images, etc.), and the display screen itself. , and the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered compared to before execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect. Furthermore, the light amount of the effect light of various light emitting means (for example, LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame and the frame 3 for the game machine is By lowering it, it is made more difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display images of decorative patterns, images of characters, etc.).

After the execution of the blackout effect, as shown in FIG. 20-55(C), the image of the character C is displayed as the preceding effect. In the pre-stage production, the contents of the lines spoken by the character C are displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 20-55(D) and 20-55(E), the switching effect is executed after the pre-stage effect is completed, and the post-stage effect is executed after the switching effect is completed. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 029SG, the mode in which only one image is displayed as the switching effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images can be displayed as the switching effect. may be displayed. When one of a plurality of images can be displayed as a switching effect in this way, the ratio of control to the big win game state may be varied according to which image is displayed.

In the post-stage production, as described above, the lines spoken by the character are displayed as the character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has a smaller number of characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed during the preceding stage effect, but the size per character is larger and the brightness is higher than the character image 029SG007 (see FIG. 20-10). .

As shown in FIG. 20-55(F), after the latter stage effect is completed, the movable body effect is executed. As the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the effect position overlapping the front side substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved to the origin position by being driven by a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (G), reach effect corresponding to each variation pattern F. If the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, reach effect I) is executed.

Next, variable display in the variation pattern of super reach λ will be described. As shown in FIGS. 20-56 (A) to 20-56 (D), in the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach λ, first, when the variable display is started, at the second timing before the reach The meter 029SG005M suddenly increases to the 5th stage and becomes full. Next, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T notifying that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (filled up) and that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect will be executed. Is displayed.

Then, the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed without any of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect D being executed. Incidentally, the presentation mode of the high-expectation ready-to-reach presentation development notification presentation is the same as the presentation mode described above with reference to FIG. 20-55. After the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect, as shown in FIG. 20-53, the ready-to-win effect I is executed and finally the variable display result is a loss or a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. It is set to be longer than the length L6b of the performance execution period, and the ready-to-win performance E is executed after the ready-to-win performance E development notification performance is started, and the variable display result as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance E is a big hit. The length L11 of the period until it is reported is that the ready-to-win performance F is executed after the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is started, and the variable display result as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance F is reported as a big hit. and the period from the start of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect to the time when the ready-to-win effect I is executed and the variable display result as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect I is announced as a big hit. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, in the case where the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the execution of the ready-to-win effect E development suggesting effect, the period until the variable display result is notified of the big win. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the excessively prolonged period of time. In addition, when the ready-to-win performance I is executed after the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance, the player is favorably focused on the ready-to-win performance I before the variable display result is reported to be a big win. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the ready-to-win effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, so it is longer than the ready-to-win effect A. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the ready-to-win performance B over the period, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9, in the ready-to-win effect B, unlike the ready-to-win effect A, the development notification effect can be executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result. Therefore, even if the ready-to-win performance E development notification performance is not executed, the player is surely paid attention to whether or not the variable display result is reported to be a big hit as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B.例文帳に追加It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A and the ready-to-win effect B, the meter effect is executed as an effect suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect. Therefore, by executing the meter effect, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the meter effect can be executed as the effect suggesting the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect can be executed. Alternatively, or in addition, the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may suggest the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, a form in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A or the reach effect B is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C or the reach effect can be executed. A meter effect may be executed even when D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect I are executed after the preliminary effect and the sign effect are executed in the middle of the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D. A case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage (changes to a display mode for notifying execution of the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect) triggered by the preliminary effect or the omen effect. By doing so, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the advance effect or the precursor effect by the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 and 20-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth step at the second timing without going through the execution of reach effect A. As a result, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed, so even if the ready-to-win performance A is not executed, the player is encouraged to execute the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development reporting performance and the ready-to-win performance I. Since it is possible to attract attention, it is possible to improve amusement in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9, when ready-to-win production B is executed, high-expectation ready-to-win production development notification production and ready-to-win production I are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect I are executed after the ready-to-win effect B is executed. By doing so, even when the ready-to-win effect B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect I are executed. You can improve your interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at a time from the first timing to the fifth timing. You may provide the case where it increases by two steps or more at any timing. Furthermore, when the timing is set such that the meter 029SG005M increases by two steps or more at any of the first timing to the fifth timing, the meter 029SG005M is raised at the timing before the ready-to-win effect A or the ready-to-win effect B starts. The rate of development to the ready-to-win effect I may be different between the case of increasing to the fifth level and the case of increasing the meter 029SG005M to the fifth level at the timing after the ready-to-win effect A and the ready-to-win effect B are started. Further, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as an example of the meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be changed in four steps or less or in six steps or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9, the ready-to-win effect I is executed after the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect I. The length L13 of the period until notification is from when the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is started to when the ready-to-win effect F is executed and the variable display result as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect F is announced to be a big hit. is set longer than the length L12 of the period, the period until the performance result is reported when the ready-to-win performance I with a higher degree of expectation for the big win is executed is lengthened to control the big win game state. It is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-23 to 20-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in this characteristic portion 029SG is maximized from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step over five stages (six stages if the meter effect non-execution state is included). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-45, the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the ready-to-win effect E in this characterizing portion 029SG has two stages, and the display mode of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 changes. It is a production that goes on. In other words, in this feature part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five levels as the meter effect, but as the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 is two levels. It can only change up to Therefore, in the meter effect, the image (the meter 029SG005M) to be effected is more likely to change up to the fifth level than in the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive effect, so the player is made to pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth level. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five levels as the meter effect, while the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 can be changed up to two levels as the reach effect E development suggestive effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changed up to five stages as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. In this way, when the display mode of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 can be changed up to the fifth stage as the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect, the display mode of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive image 029SG170 can be changed to the fifth stage. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9, in the variable display of super reach δ and super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is the reach effect E development suggestive effect executable. Since it is set longer than the length of the period L6a, the ready-to-win performance E that the ready-to-win performance F with a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance A is executed after the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed. Since the ready-to-win performance E can be suggested over a longer period of time than execution of the development notification performance is suggested, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this characterizing portion 029SG, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the ready-to-win effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 029SG, the mode in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when execution of the meter effect is not determined is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when execution of the meter effect is determined. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the first step increase timing.

Further, the ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect is a effect that can be executed after the variable display result (loss) is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B, so the ready-to-reach effect E develops during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B. By executing the suggestive performance, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player recognizing that the variable display result as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B is not reported as a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as a pattern to develop from the ready-to-reach effect B to the ready-to-reach effect E, after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect E are executed. Although only the pattern (see FIG. 20-8 (F)) is disclosed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a pattern that develops from the reach performance B to the reach performance E, the reach performance B A case may be provided in which the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect E are executed before the variable display result is announced as the result of the effect. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect E development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect E are executed before the variable display result is announced as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-win effect B is executed. The ready-to-reach effect E development suggesting effect may be made executable.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-31 to 20-34, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A to F, the chance-up effect can be executed, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of player.

In particular, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η in which the ready-to-win effect F is executed after the ready-to-win effect A, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A, the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performed twice. During execution of the ready-to-win effect F, the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red, the action of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promoting image are displayed. It is possible to execute an effect that constitutes a chance-up effect over a total of three times of image display. Therefore, regarding the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach η, the number of executions of the effects constituting the chance-up effect increases during the execution of the reach effect F than during the execution of the reach effect A. It is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the effect result of the effect F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the ready-to-win effect B is executed, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-reach title is displayed in red, and the action and cut of the movable body 32 are performed. In addition to the display of the in-image 029SG200, it is possible to execute a production that constitutes a chance-up production for a total of three times. It is possible to execute an effect constituting a chance-up effect over a total of two times with the motion of the body 32. - 特許庁Therefore, regarding the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ζ, the number of executions of the effects constituting the chance-up effect is smaller during the execution of the reach effect E than during the execution of the reach effect B. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the effect result of E, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the ready-to-win effect B is executed, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B, the ready-to-win title is displayed in red and the movable body is displayed. 32 and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 can be performed a total of three times. , and the action of the movable body 32, which constitutes a chance-up effect. Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after the effect B is executed, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect B, the same number of effects constituting the chance-up effect can be executed as during the execution of the ready-to-win effect E. may be

In addition, in this characterizing portion 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, display of the reach title in red, movement of the movable body 32, display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) in , the operation of the image display device 5 itself, and the like may be included in the effects constituting the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, red display of the ready-to-win title, movement of the movable body 32, display of the cut-in image 029SG200, display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, and the like are displayed. Both of these exemplify effects that are executed regardless of the player's operation (active effects), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that constitute the chance-up effect include: An effect (active effect) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the light emission color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A (so-called back button). directing) may be included.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9 and 20-30, variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ can be executed. The ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win can be determined from the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D having a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance C.例文帳に追加Then, before the variable display result is reported as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D, when the advance performance and the sign performance are executed and the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is performed. When I is executed and a variable display result (loss) is announced as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C or the ready-to-win performance D, when the ready-to-win performance G development notification performance is executed, the reach with a lower expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance I. Production G is executed.

Furthermore, before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-win performance D, when the advance performance and the sign performance are executed and the ready-to-reach performance H development notification performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance I is started. Since the ready-to-win performance H with a low degree of expectation for big win is executed, the performance can be diversified by combining the type of ready-to-win performance and the development notification performance.

In particular, for the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in Figures 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B) By determining which one of the ready-to-win performance C and the ready-to-reach performance D is to be executed, the sign performance is executed more when the ready-to-win performance C is determined than when the ready-to-reach performance D is determined. Since the ready-to-win performance I (high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance) is set to be executed after the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is set high, a predetermined relationship is given to the ready-to-win performance to be executed and the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance. It is possible to improve the performance interest of the reach performance and the development notification performance.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, the ready-to-reach effect to be executed is determined from the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect C during variable display and the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect D during variable display are separately provided. may be set to

20-34, the characterizing section 029SG determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern at different ratios according to the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The executable chance-up effect may be made executable as a effect suggesting that one of the ready-to-win effect E to the ready-to-win effect I is executed (developing to one of the ready-to-win effect E to the ready-to-win effect I). .

Furthermore, as the chance-up effect, in addition to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit, one of the ready-to-win effects E to the ready-to-win effect I is executed, and the big win game when the variable display result is a big win. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10 rounds, that the game is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends, and the like.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-9, when the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed, and after the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed In the case where the ready-to-win performance H development notification performance is executed, the common preliminary performance can be executed in the period between the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D and the development notification performance, so that the preliminary performance is executed. While increasing the player's attention to the development notification performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance and the ready-to-win performance H development notification performance is executed as the development notification performance, It can improve amusement interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 to 20-9 and FIGS. 20-27 to 20-28, during the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is executed. Suggestion of which of ready-to-win production H development notification production and high-expectation ready-to-reach production development information production will be executed later, and suggestion of both execution of ready-to-reach production H development information production and high-expectation ready-to-reach production development information production. Since the possible branch destination suggestive performance can be executed, the ready-to-win performance H developmental notification performance and the ready-to-win performance H developmental information performance are enhanced while heightening the player's attention to the execution of the development report performance by executing the development destination suggestive performance. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as the development destination suggesting effect, the execution of the ready-to-reach effect H development notification effect and the execution of the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect have been exemplified. , The present invention is not limited to this, and as the development destination suggesting effect, it may be possible to suggest that the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect will be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a development destination suggesting effect can be executed by variable display of the ready-to-reach effect C or the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect C has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win effect A and the variable display of the variation pattern to execute the ready-to-win effect B, the development destination suggesting effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (D), before the performance result is notified as the reach performance C or the reach performance D, the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed. With respect to the variation pattern of κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect and the ready-to-win effect G are executed after the effect result is notified as the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, the variable display result is a big hit. When it becomes, the difference between the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect C and the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ is 60%, whereas the variation pattern of the super reach θ Since the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed is 40%, depending on which of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed, the reach performance I is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in which is executed, or a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ in which ready reach effect H is executed, so reach effect C and reach effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 029SG, when the variable display result of the variation pattern of the super reach κ and the variation pattern of the super reach θ is a big hit, the reach effect C is performed by the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the ratio of execution and the ratio of execution of ready-to-win effect D is the difference between the ratio of execution of ready-to-win effect C and the ratio of execution of ready-to-win effect D in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. is set small, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the reach effect C is executed by variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ The difference between the ratio at which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the ratio at which the ready-to-win effect D is executed is greater than the difference between the ratio at which the ready-to-reach effect C is executed and the ratio in which the ready-to-win effect D is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U that can display the reserved memory display at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-1, as shown in FIG. center) may be provided with an active display area 029SG005F capable of displaying a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, when the active display can be displayed in this way, a plurality of display modes of the active display are provided in the same manner as the pre-reading notice effect described above, and a big hit is expected depending on which display mode the active display is displayed. Active display effects with different degrees may be executed. For example, there are three types of active displays: a white round shape, a blue round shape, and a red round shape. The expectation level of the jackpot should be set to the lowest when it is displayed as a white circle (the expectation level of the jackpot in the display mode of the active display: red>blue>white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during variable display. It may be possible to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit in the display has increased.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during variable display, as shown in FIGS. Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the ready-to-win effect E is executed after (loss) is once notified, the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape and a blue round shape during the ready-to-win effect E. Let P1 be the changing rate of the red circle.

In addition, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of super ready-to-win η, in which the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed while the ready-to-win effect A is being executed and the ready-to-win effect F is further executed, is actively displayed during the ready-to-win effect A to be executed. P2 is the rate at which the display mode changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape. Let P3 be the changing rate of the circular shape.

At this time, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect F, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle. P1, which is the rate at which the aspect changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape; It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when the reach effect A is executed and the reach effect F is executed), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect It is possible to reduce the risk that the player will recognize in advance that the ready-to-win effect F will be executed by changing the display mode of the active display to a red round shape from before the start. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect E is executed and when the ready-to-win effect F is executed, the ready-to-win effect F, in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the ready-to-win effect E, has a higher proportion of active display, and the display mode of the active display is a red round shape. By changing to , the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red round shape according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F. A mode in which the rate of change P3 is higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during execution of the ready-to-win effect A has been exemplified, but the present invention is However, as a modification 029SG-2, in the same variable display as in the modification 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display with the variation pattern of the super reach η. The rate P3 of changing from a round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape while the reach effect A is being executed. While setting it higher than the ratio P2, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The rate P1 may be set higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape during execution of the ready-to-win effect B.

In this way, by providing a plurality of modes as the active display mode and differentiating the degree of expectation for a big win depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation for a big win. When the display mode of the active display changes to a red circular shape before executing the ready-to-win performance E development notification performance or the high-expectation ready-to-win performance development notification performance, the player recognizes in advance that the degree of expectation for the big win is high. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game interest will be lowered due to

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, the variation pattern of the super reach λ in which the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect development notification effect is executed without going through the reach effect such as the ready-to-reach effect A and the ready-to-reach effect B, and the ready-to-reach effect I is executed. However, as a modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red color before the start of the reach production I. may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win effect I. By changing the display mode of the active display from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape before the ready-to-win effect I is executed, the player is made to recognize in advance that the ready-to-win effect I will be executed. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach production I. Although the ratio P5 is set higher than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win effect I has been exemplified, the present invention is It is not limited to this, and in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape before the start of the ready reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the ready-to-win effect I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the ready-to-win effect I is executed without going through other ready-to-reach effects even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red round shape. Unexpectedness can be imparted to the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes of the reserved memory display and the active display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. Although an example has been exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on which display mode the reserved memory display or the active display is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory display or the active display. The number of display modes may be two or four or more.

Furthermore, in Modification 029SG-1 to Modification 029SG-3, the form in which the display mode of the active display can be changed during execution of the ready-to-win effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the active The change timing of the display mode may include a timing other than during execution of the ready-to-win effect, for example, during execution of a development suggestive effect or a development notification effect, start timing of variable display, and the like. Further, when a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols can be executed during variable display, the display mode of active display may be changed at the timing of temporary stop and re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, three types of display modes of the reserved memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, as a display mode of the pending memory table display, in addition to a round shape, a triangle, a square, and a star Suggests which reach performance of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I will be developed according to which shape the reserved memory display is displayed. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at the time of winning and determines that the variation pattern (variation category) is super reach, it further determines which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ. (Which of the ready-to-win effect A to ready-to-win effect I is to be executed during variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command according to the determination (including information on which super reach variation pattern is to be executed) Variation category command) may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 . By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the display mode of the reservation memory table display from round, triangle, square, star, etc. based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. . In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the start of the variable display, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, a form that can suggest a reach effect that develops depending on the shape of the reserved memory display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the reserved memory display In addition to suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, it may be possible to further suggest the ready-to-win performance of the development destination by the shape of the reserved memory display. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and the shape of the display of the reserved memory, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, the form that can suggest the reach effect of the development destination by the shape of the reserved memory display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the reserved memory display develops The ready-to-reach effect that can suggest the destination may be only a part of the ready-to-reach effect E, the ready-to-reach effect F, the ready-to-reach effect G, the ready-to-reach effect H, and the ready-to-reach effect I (for example, only the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect I). .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, as the chance-up effect, a mode is exemplified in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effect A to the reach effect F, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the ready-to-win title image displayed in black may be changed to red from the middle. In particular, when the character of the ready-to-win title image is changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation degree image indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit displayed together with the ready-to-win title image can be changed (for example, , increasing the number of stars displayed as the degree-of-expectation image, etc.). By doing so, the display mode of the expectation level image changes as the color of the characters of the reach title image changes from black to red. To allow a player to accurately recognize the degree of expectation of a ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 20-28, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, the ready reach effect of super reach to be executed is reach effect C and reach effect D. Although the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect can be determined at the same rate in each case, the present invention is not limited to this, and super reach κ Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestive effect is executed at a different rate depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the branch destination suggestive effect It may be possible to determine the production pattern of .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-59 as a modification 029SG-6, before the variable display result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect C during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D In the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ where the high expectation reach effect is executed at the beginning, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 15% Execution in pattern X of branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 30%, execution in pattern Y of branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern Z of branch destination suggestive effect is determined. Run is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect D, non-execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestive effect is determined. Execution with pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, execution with pattern Y of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution with pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in this modification 029SG-6, when execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, execution of ready-to-win effect D is determined in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution determination ratio of the branch destination suggestive effect is set higher than in the case where the branch destination suggestive effect is executed (the decision ratio of non-execution of the branch destination suggestive effect is set low), the ready-to-win effect H is displayed during the execution of the variable display. It is possible to favorably suggest the execution of a development notification effect such as a development notification effect, a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, or a development notification effect, thereby improving amusement in a game.

In this modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Although the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than the case where it is set, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution of the effect C is determined, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggesting effect is set lower than when the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. good too.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, when execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, execution of the ready-to-win effect D is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestive effect (the effect pattern suggesting the execution of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect) is set higher than in the case of being determined, the variable display is being executed. In , it is possible to more preferably suggest that the development notification performance such as the ready-to-win performance H development notification performance or the high-expectation ready-to-win development development notification performance is executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the modification 029SG-6, when execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Although the execution decision ratio in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than in the case where the super reach κ is changed, the present invention is not limited to this. When execution of ready-to-reach effect C is determined in the variable display of , than when execution of ready-to-reach effect D is determined in variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, branch destination suggesting effect pattern Z The execution decision ratio may be set low.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 20-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach to be executed is the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D. Although an embodiment has been exemplified in which the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestive effect can be determined at different rates depending on the situation, the present invention is not limited to this, super reach θ, Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach ι, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch is performed at different rates depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The effect pattern of the previous suggestive effect may be determinable.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, a branch destination suggestive effect (first advantageous result suggestive effect in invention 033SG) that can be executed during execution of ready-to-win effect C and a branch destination suggestive effect that can be executed during execution of ready-to-win effect D (Second Advantageous Result Suggesting Effect in Invention 033SG) is exemplified as an effect of the same effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. The executable branch destination suggestive effect and the branch destination suggestive effect executable during execution of the ready-to-win effect D may be executed as different effect modes.

Further, in the characterizing part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 20-5 to 20-9, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and reach effects E to reach I are executed. As for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any one of these reach effects A to D is simply executed and the variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to reach D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and any one of reach effects E to reach reach I In addition to the first notification mode, the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing to the above-mentioned first notification mode is once notified that the variable display result is lost as the performance result of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect D. A second notification mode (so-called revival mode) may be provided in which it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit.

In this way, the reach effects A to D are executed as the reach effects of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach effects E to I. When the notification mode and the second notification mode are provided, the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of the ready-to-reach performance C or the ready-to-reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode. is the same as the ratio of executing the branch destination suggesting effect in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. good too.

Thus, the ready-to-reach performance A to the ready-to-reach performance D are executed as the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any one of the ready-to-reach performance E to the ready-to-reach performance I in the second reporting mode. is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by being informed again that the variable display result is a big win, even though the variable display result is once reported as a loss. Furthermore, the execution of the branch destination suggesting effect is performed when the effect result (variable display result) in the case of executing the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode and in the second notification mode. can be shared, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing to any of reach effects E to reach I. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as modes, when the rendering result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is notified in the first reporting mode, the pattern of the branch destination suggesting effect is provided. The ratio of execution in Z and the ratio of execution of branch destination suggestive effect in pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of ready-to-reach effect C or ready-to-reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. Although the same form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and ready-to-reach effects A to ready-to-reach effects D are executed as ready-to-win effects of super reach, and any of ready-to-win effects E to ready-to-reach effects I When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without developing into the first notification mode, the performance result (variable display result) of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is the first notification mode. When the branch destination suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode, the branch destination when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode. The rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in the pattern Z may be different.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as the reach effects of super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing to any of the reach effects E to I. As for modes, the variable display result is temporarily lost as the first notification mode in which one of these ready-to-reach effects A to D is simply executed and the variable display result is reported, and the variable display result is temporarily lost as the effect results of the ready-to-reach effects A to D. A second notification mode is exemplified in which the variable display result is again notified that the result is a big hit after being notified that it is, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 029SG As -8, the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D is executed, and after notifying that the variable display result is wrong as the effect result of these ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, the ready-to-reach effect G development notification effect and the ready-to-reach effect G is executed, and it is reported that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect G (when variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is variable, and the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D (variable display result) is notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the display. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D is executed, the execution ratio of the chance-up effect depends on whether or not the ready-to-win effect G is executed before the variable display result is announced as a big win. can be made different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the ratio of execution of the chance-up effect during the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is the second notification mode for the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Although a form different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display notified in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display results) of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D are notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

Further, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 20-27, the branch destination suggesting effect can be executed in a plurality of effect patterns, and depending on which effect pattern the branch destination suggesting effect is executed A form with a different ratio of execution of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is exemplified. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestive effect is executed in the effect pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the branch destination suggesting performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation reach performance development notification performance may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

In particular, in the case where the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect is executed at an extremely high rate when the branch destination suggestive effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the branch destination suggestive effect is the effect pattern Z. If the high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification effect is not executed despite being executed in Z, or if the ready-to-reach production I is executed although the high-expectation reach production development notification effect is not executed (so-called A pattern of production contradiction) may be provided. In addition, when such a pattern of performance contradiction is provided, the branch destination suggesting performance in the performance pattern Z and the ready-to-win performance I are executed in the pattern of the performance contradiction only when the variable display result is reported as a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the pattern Z or when the ready-to-win performance I is executed, the high-expectation ready-to-reach performance development notification performance is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 20-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, further ready-to-win effect G development notification effect and ready-to-win effect G As for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ that is executed, a form in which the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-win effect D are different is exemplified, but the present invention is based on this As a modification 029SG-10, the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D may be the same for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing so, in both cases where the ready-to-win effect C is executed and the case to execute the ready-to-win effect D, the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D. Since the player can expect that the ready-to-win performance development notification performance is executed after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, a form in which the execution determination ratio of ready-to-win effect C and the execution determination ratio of ready-to-win effect D are the same was exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, and in both the case where the ready-to-reach effect C is executed and the case where the ready-to-reach effect D is executed, the variable display result is (off ) is reported, the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect C and the execution decision ratio of the ready-to-win effect D are possible if the player can expect the execution of the ready-to-win effect development notification effect. and a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are substantially the same) and may be different.

Further, in the characterizing part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 20-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the result of the ready-to-win effect C or the ready-to-win effect D, further ready-to-win effect G development notification effect and ready-to-win effect G is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the degree of expectation for the big hit when the execution of the ready-to-win performance C is determined is smaller than the degree of expectation for the big win when the execution of the ready-to-win performance D is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the execution of the reach effect C is determined. The big-hit expectation and the big-hit expectation when execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined may be the same. By doing so, in both cases in which the ready-to-win effect C is executed and in the case to execute the ready-to-win effect, when the ready-to-win effect G development notification effect is executed, the effect result of the ready-to-win effect G is displayed as a variable display result. Since the player can expect to be informed that will be a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the expectation of the big hit when the execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined and the big hit when the execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined Although the form in which the degree of expectation is the same is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to produce an effect that a player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit as the result of the ready-to-win effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed, the reach is possible. There is a small difference between the expectation of jackpot of production C and the expectation of jackpot of ready-to-win production D (for example, the difference between the expectation of jackpot of ready-to-win production C and the expectation of jackpot of ready-to-win production D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the ready-to-win production The degree of expectation of a big hit of C and the degree of expectation of a big hit of the ready-to-win production D may be substantially the same) and may be different.

20-34, in the characterizing portion 029SG, red display of the ready-to-win title, movement of the movable body 32, display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and a stick as an operation promotion image are displayed as effects constituting the chance-up effect. The display of the image of the controller 31A can be executed, and the reach performance A to the reach performance D, which are executed before the reach performance E development notification performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and the reach performance E development notification performance and high expectation are executed. In the ready-to-reach effect E and the ready-to-reach effect F executed before the ready-to-reach effect development notification effect, the red display of the ready-to-reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are exemplified as a common effect, but the present invention is this. As a modification 029SG-12, a common effect of the red display of these reach titles and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in one of the reach effects A to F. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ according to the amount. By doing so, while suppressing an increase in the number of effects that can be executed as a chance-up effect (the number of effect patterns of the chance-up effect), the red display of the ready-to-win title and the movement of the movable body 32 are both the execution of the ready-to-win effect. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether the player is properly inside, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 20-34, whether the chance-up effect is executed or not and the effect of the chance-up effect are different depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. Although the form in which the pattern can be determined has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 20-60 as a modification 029SG-13, before the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the high expectation reach effect development notification As for the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the performance and the ready-to-reach performance I are executed, the chance-up performance is performed at different rates between when the ready-to-reach performance C is determined and when the ready-to-reach performance D is determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, when execution of the ready-to-win effect D is determined, execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a higher rate than when execution of the ready-to-win effect C is determined. When execution of the ready-to-win performance D is determined, it is possible to easily suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode in which it is once notified that the variable display result is lost as the effect results of the ready-to-win effect A to the ready-to-win effect D, and then the variable display result is again notified to be a big hit. (So-called resurrection mode) has been exemplified, but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. A resurrection performance may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit between the time when the variable display is stopped.

In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result is wrong as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D (variation of any one of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ 20-61(A) to 20-61(C), the length L21 of the resurrection effect effect period is changed to the ready-to-win effect effect. As the effect result of B, when the reach effect E development suggesting effect, reach effect E development notification effect, and reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is once notified (variable with the super reach ζ variation pattern When the display is executed), the length of the period L22 from the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestive effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect E (variable display result notification timing), and the effect results of the ready-to-win effect C and the ready-to-win effect D After the variable display result is notified that the result is lost, the reach effect G development suggesting effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach θ If the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect is set to be shorter than the length L23 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect G (variable display result notification timing), the effect becomes redundant. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 20-61(A) to 20-61(C), the length L21 of the production period of the revival production is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win production E development suggestive production to the ready-to-reach production E development notification production. or the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect G development suggestive effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect G developmental notification effect, the variable display result is Unexpectedness can be imparted to the notification of the failure.

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-14, as the effect results of the ready-to-reach effect A to the ready-to-reach effect D, the resurrection effect is executed after being once notified that the variable display result is wrong, but the present invention is this. However, when the high-expectation ready-to-win effect development notification effect and ready-to-win effect F are executed during the execution of the ready-to-win effect A (variable display is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of super reach η and a big hit is achieved case), when the advance effect, the omen effect, the reach effect H development notification effect, and the reach effect H are executed during the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι). If it becomes a big hit), during the execution of reach production C and reach production D, advance production, omen production, high expectation reach production development notification production, reach production I is executed (variable with super reach κ fluctuation pattern In the case where the display is executed and the jackpot is won), a case where the resurrection effect is executed may be provided.

In addition, as shown in the characterizing part 029SG, the ratio of the hits to be hit by the ready-to-win performance A to the ready-to-reach performance D (the degree of expectation of the big hit) is determined by the ready-to-win performance F, the ready-to-reach performance G, and the ready-to-win performance I. Since it is set lower than the ratio (big hit expectation), when the variable display result is a big hit, it is once notified that the variable display result is lost as the production result of the reach production A to the reach production D. The ready-to-win performance A to ready-to-win performance D are executed and variable by setting the ratio of execution of the resurrection performance after the ready-to-win performance to be higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win performance F, the ready-to-win performance G and the ready-to-win performance I to achieve a big win. Even when it is reported that the display result is a loss, the player may be made to pay attention to the execution of the resurrection effect.

After the ready-to-win performance B is temporarily notified that the variable display result is a loss as the performance result of the ready-to-win performance B, the ready-to-reach performance E development suggesting performance, the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance, and the ready-to-win performance E are executed to result in a big hit. (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ and a big hit is achieved), or after being notified once that the variable display result is lost as the result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, the reach performance G When the development suggesting performance, ready-to-win performance G developmental notification performance, and ready-to-win performance G are executed to result in a big hit (when variable display is performed according to the variation pattern of super reach θ to result in a big win), the resurrection performance is also executed. Although a case may be provided, in the case where the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of these super reach ζ and super reach θ, it is notified that the variable display result will be lost once before the resurrection effect. Super ready-to-win ζ, super When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of reach θ and a big hit is achieved, the resurrection effect is not executed, or the fluctuation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ is used. The resurrection effect may be executed at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed and the big win is achieved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 029SG, a form that can be controlled in a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the variable display is executed is a specific number (for example, 900 times, etc.) ), it may be possible to control the time-saving state in response to reaching ), or in the case where the variable display result is lost, it may be possible to control the time-saving state in response to the fact that some deviations are derived and displayed. good.

In particular, in this way, when controlling to the time-saving state in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number of times, or when controlling to the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of some deviations , The high-expectation ready-to-reach production development notification production shown in the characteristic part 029SG, and the production for notifying that it will be controlled to the time saving state after executing the resurrection production shown in the modification 029SG-14 may be executed. . By doing so, when controlling to the time saving state according to the number of executions of the variable display reaching a specific number of times, or when controlling to the time saving state according to the fact that some deviations are derived and displayed , high-expectation ready-to-reach production Whether it is controlled to a time-saving state by executing the development notification production or revival production, whether the variable display result is notified that it is a big hit, or high-expected reach production such as ready-to-win production I Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether the is executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the characteristic portion 029SG, an embodiment in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are implemented has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG is implemented. You may make it

Further, in the characterizing section 029SG, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to slot machines.

1... Pachinko machine 4A... First special symbol display device 4B... Second special symbol display device 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Production control board 50... Special variable winning ball device 51... V winning area 100... Game Control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
120 ... CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
special state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern;
an informing means capable of executing a plurality of types of informing including value informing of the value obtained by the player;
As suggestive effects suggesting control to the advantageous state, a special suggestive effect, and a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is lower than the special suggestive effect. , and a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a fourth suggestive effect;
Before the performance result of the first suggested performance is reported, it is reported that the special development performance can be executed as the first development pattern, and that the effect result of the second suggested performance is not controlled to the advantageous state. a development effect execution means capable of executing a special development effect different from the special development effect as a second development pattern after the special development effect;
with
The special state control means is capable of controlling the special state until the variable display is performed a first number of times after the end of the advantageous state,
The notification means executes the value notification during the variable display in which the number of executions of the variable display during the special state is the first number,
The advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state,
The variable display pattern determining means is
when the number of executions of the variable display during the special state is the first number, it can be determined using specific determination data;
a variable display pattern can be determined using data for normal determination when the number of executions of variable display during the special state is less than the first number;
The data for normal determination is variable from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern and a special variable display pattern, corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the first type advantageous state. A display pattern can be determined, and a plurality of types of variables including a predetermined variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern and the special variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display that triggers the control to the second type advantageous state Data that enables determination of any variable display pattern from the display patterns,
The specific determination data is used in both the case of variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state and the case of variable display that triggers control to the second type advantageous state. Data for determining a specific variable display pattern and determining a notification variable display pattern capable of executing the value notification by the notification means in response to the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state,
The specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the notification variable display pattern,
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the third suggestion performance having the higher expectation level than the first suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance executing means, the fourth suggestive performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed,
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production,
The special development effect includes a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered, a second effect which is executed after the first effect and in which the previous stage information is displayed so as to be visible, and the second effect. a tertiary effect, which is an effect executed after the secondary effect and in which latter-stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than the preceding-stage information is visibly displayed,
The period from execution of the special development performance to notification of control to the advantageous state is longer than the period from execution of the special development performance to notification of control to the advantageous state. shorter period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images